neovim

options.lua (451260B)

---

-- vim: tw=78

--- @class vim.option_meta
--- @field full_name string
--- @field desc? string
--- @field abbreviation? string
--- @field alias? string|string[]
--- @field short_desc? string|fun(): string
--- @field varname? string
--- @field flags_varname? string
--- @field type vim.option_type
--- @field immutable? boolean
--- @field list? 'comma'|'onecomma'|'commacolon'|'onecommacolon'|'flags'|'flagscomma'
--- @field scope vim.option_scope[]
--- @field deny_duplicates? boolean
--- @field enable_if? string
--- @field defaults? vim.option_defaults|vim.option_value|fun(): string
--- @field values? vim.option_valid_values
--- @field flags? true|table<string,integer>
--- @field secure? true
--- @field noglob? true
--- @field normal_fname_chars? true
--- @field pri_mkrc? true
--- @field deny_in_modelines? true
--- @field normal_dname_chars? true
--- @field modelineexpr? true
--- @field func? true
--- @field expand? string|true
--- @field nodefault? true
--- @field no_mkrc? true
--- @field alloced? true
--- @field redraw? vim.option_redraw[]
---
--- If not provided and `values` is present, then is set to 'did_set_str_generic'
--- @field cb? string
---
--- If not provided and `values` is present, then is set to 'expand_set_str_generic'
--- @field expand_cb? string
--- @field tags? string[]

--- @class vim.option_defaults
--- @field condition? string
---    string: #ifdef string
---    !string: #ifndef string
--- @field if_true vim.option_value|fun(): string
--- @field if_false? vim.option_value
--- @field doc? string Default to show in options.txt
--- @field meta? string Default to use in Lua meta files

--- @alias vim.option_scope 'global'|'buf'|'win'
--- @alias vim.option_type 'boolean'|'number'|'string'
--- @alias vim.option_value boolean|integer|string
--- @alias vim.option_valid_values (string|[string,vim.option_valid_values])[]

--- @alias vim.option_redraw
--- |'statuslines'
--- |'tabline'
--- |'current_window'
--- |'current_buffer'
--- |'all_windows'
--- |'curswant'
--- |'highlight_only'
--- |'ui_option'

--- @param s string
--- @return string
local function cstr(s)
 return '"' .. s:gsub('["\\]', '\\%0'):gsub('\t', '\\t') .. '"'
end

--- @param s string
--- @param t vim.option_type
--- @return fun(): string, vim.option_type
local function macros(s, t)
 return function()
   return s, t
 end
end

--- @param s string
--- @return fun(): string
local function N_(s) -- luacheck: ignore 211 (currently unused)
 return function()
   return 'N_(' .. cstr(s) .. ')'
 end
end

-- luacheck: ignore 621
local options = {
 cstr = cstr,
 --- @type string[]
 valid_scopes = { 'global', 'buf', 'win' },
 --- @type vim.option_meta[]
 --- The order of the options MUST be alphabetic for ":set all".
 options = {
   {
     abbreviation = 'al',
     defaults = 224,
     full_name = 'aleph',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('ASCII code of the letter Aleph (Hebrew)'),
     type = 'number',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ari',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Allow CTRL-_ in Insert mode.  This is default off, to avoid that users
       that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get into reverse
       Insert mode, and don't know how to get out.  See 'revins'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'allowrevins',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('allow CTRL-_ in Insert mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ari',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ambw',
     cb = 'did_set_ambiwidth',
     defaults = 'single',
     values = { 'single', 'double' },
     desc = [=[
       Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
       Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
       letters, Cyrillic letters).

       There are currently two possible values:
       "single":	Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII.  This is
       		expected by most users.
       "double":	Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
       						*E834* *E835*
       The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
       contains a character that would be double width.  These errors may
       also be given when calling setcellwidths().

       The values are overruled for characters specified with
       |setcellwidths()|.

       There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
       those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
       legacy/traditional CJK encodings.  In those encodings, Euro,
       Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
       therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them.  This is also
       true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
       file.  Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
       Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
       (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
       this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
       by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font.  Perhaps it also has
       to be set to "double" under CJK MS-Windows when the system locale is
       set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode Standard Annex #11
       (https://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'ambiwidth',
     redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('what to do with Unicode chars of ambiguous width'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ambw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'arab',
     cb = 'did_set_arabic',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
       Setting this option will:
       - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
       - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
       - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
         between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
       - Set the 'delcombine' option

       Resetting this option will:
       - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
       - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
       Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
       option).
       Also see |l10n-arabic.txt|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'arabic',
     redraw = { 'curswant' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('Arabic as a default second language'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'arshape',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
       corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
       take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
       one which encompasses:
         a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
            within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
         b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
         c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
       When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone
       form.
       Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
       further details see |l10n-arabic.txt|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'arabicshape',
     redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('do shaping for Arabic characters'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_arshape',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'acd',
     cb = 'did_set_autochdir',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
       open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
       It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
       or selected.  When a buffer has no name it also has no directory, thus
       the current directory won't change when navigating to it.
       Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autochdir',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('change directory to the file in the current window'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_acd',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ac',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, Vim shows a completion menu as you type, similar to using
       |i_CTRL-N|, but triggered automatically.  See |ins-autocompletion|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autocomplete',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('automatic completion in insert mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ac',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'acl',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Delay in milliseconds before the autocomplete menu appears after
       typing.  If you prefer it not to open too quickly, set this value
       slightly above your typing speed.  See |ins-autocompletion|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autocompletedelay',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('delay in msec before menu appears after typing'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_acl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'act',
     defaults = 80,
     desc = [=[
       Initial timeout (in milliseconds) for the decaying time-sliced
       completion algorithm.  Starts at this value, halves for each slower
       source until a minimum is reached.  All sources run, but slower ones
       are quickly de-prioritized.  The default is tuned so the popup menu
       opens within ~200ms even with multiple slow sources on a slow system.
       Changing this value is rarely needed.  Only 80 or higher is valid.
       Special case: when 'complete' contains "F" or "o" (function sources),
       a longer timeout is used, allowing up to ~1s for sources such as LSP
       servers that may sometimes take longer (e.g., while loading modules).
       See |ins-autocompletion|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autocompletetimeout',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('initial decay timeout for autocompletion algorithm'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_act',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ai',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
       in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command).  If you do not
       type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
       <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again.  Moving the cursor
       to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included
       in 'cpoptions'.
       When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
       reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
       line.
       When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
       a different way.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autoindent',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('take indent for new line from previous line'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ai',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ar',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
       it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
       When the file has been deleted this is not done, so you have the text
       from before it was deleted.  When it appears again then it is read.
       |timestamp|
       If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
       using the global value: >vim
       	set autoread<
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autoread',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('autom. read file when changed outside of Vim'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ar',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'aw',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
       `:next`, `:rewind`, `:last`, `:first`, `:previous`, `:stop`,
       `:suspend`, `:tag`, `:!`, `:make`, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when
       a `:buffer`, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one
       to another file.
       A buffer is not written if it becomes hidden, e.g. when 'bufhidden' is
       set to "hide" and `:next` is used.
       Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
       'autowriteall' for that.
       Some buffers will not be written, specifically when 'buftype' is
       "nowrite", "nofile", "terminal" or "prompt".
       USE WITH CARE: If you make temporary changes to a buffer that you
       don't want to be saved this option may cause it to be saved anyway.
       Renaming the buffer with ":file {name}" may help avoid this.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autowrite',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('automatically write file if changed'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_aw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'awa',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew",
       ":quit", ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim
       window.
       Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
       been set.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'autowriteall',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("as 'autowrite', but works with more commands"),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_awa',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bg',
     cb = 'did_set_background',
     defaults = 'dark',
     values = { 'light', 'dark' },
     desc = [=[
       When set to "dark" or "light", adjusts the default color groups for
       that background type.  The |TUI| or other UI sets this on startup
       (triggering |OptionSet|) if it can detect the background color.

       This option does NOT change the background color, it tells Nvim what
       the "inherited" (terminal/GUI) background looks like.
       See |:hi-normal| if you want to set the background color explicitly.
       					*g:colors_name*
       When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set)
       changing 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded.  If
       the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
       However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
       be undone.  First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed.

       Normally this option would be set in the vimrc file.  Possibly
       depending on the terminal name.  Example: >vim
       	if $TERM ==# "xterm"
       	  set background=dark
       	endif
       <	When this option is changed, the default settings for the highlight groups
       will change.  To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
       the setting of the 'background' option.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'background',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('"dark" or "light", used for highlight colors'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bg',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bs',
     cb = 'did_set_backspace',
     defaults = 'indent,eol,start',
     values = { 'indent', 'eol', 'start', 'nostop' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
       mode.  This is a list of items, separated by commas.  Each item allows
       a way to backspace over something:
       value	effect	~
       indent	allow backspacing over autoindent
       eol	allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
       start	allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
       	stop once at the start of insert.
       nostop	like start, except CTRL-W and CTRL-U do not stop at the start
       	of insert.

       When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used, none of
       the ways mentioned for the items above are possible.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'backspace',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('how backspace works at start of line'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bk',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Make a backup before overwriting a file.  Leave it around after the
       file has been successfully written.  If you do not want to keep the
       backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
       written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
       the default).  If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
       options (use this if your file system is almost full).  See the
       |backup-table| for more explanations.
       When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
       When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
       oldest version of a file.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'backup',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('keep backup file after overwriting a file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_bk',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bkc',
     cb = 'did_set_backupcopy',
     defaults = { condition = 'UNIX', if_false = 'auto', if_true = 'auto' },
     values = { 'yes', 'auto', 'no', 'breaksymlink', 'breakhardlink' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
       done.  This is a comma-separated list of words.

       The main values are:
       "yes"	make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
       "no"	rename the file and write a new one
       "auto"	one of the previous, what works best

       Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
       "breaksymlink"	always break symlinks when writing
       "breakhardlink"	always break hardlinks when writing

       Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
       - Takes extra time to copy the file.
       + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
         has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
       - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
         not of the real file.

       Renaming the file and writing a new one:
       + It's fast.
       - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
         file.
       - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.

       The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming the
       file is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on
       and the file is not a link) that is used.  When problems are expected,
       a copy will be made.

       The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
       combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto".  When included, they
       force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
       exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
       become the backup and writing a new file in its place.  This can be
       useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
       hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
       be propagated back to the original source.
       							*crontab*
       One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
       that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
       the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
       backup file instead of the newly created file.  "crontab -e" is an
       example, as are several |file-watcher| daemons like inotify.  In that
       case you probably want to switch this option.

       When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
       with the new text.  This means that protection bits, owner and
       symbolic links of the original file are unmodified.  The backup file,
       however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file.  The
       group of the backup is set to the group of the original file.  If this
       fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
       others.

       When the file is renamed, this is the other way around: The backup has
       the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
       is owned by the current user.  When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
       link, the new file will not!  That's why the "auto" value doesn't
       rename when the file is a link.  The owner and group of the newly
       written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
       the system may refuse to do this.  In that case the "auto" value will
       again not rename the file.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'backupcopy',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("make backup as a copy, don't rename the file"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bkc',
     flags_varname = 'bkc_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bdir',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
       - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
         where this is possible.  If none of the directories exist Nvim will
         attempt to create the last directory in the list.
       - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
         impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
       - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
         as the edited file.
       - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
         the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
         "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
         ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
       - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
         of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
         name, precede it with a backslash.
       - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
       - A directory name may end in an '/'.
       - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
         the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
         with all path separators changed to percent '%' signs.  This will
         ensure file name uniqueness in the backup directory.
         On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
         separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
         include the comma in the file name.  Therefore it is recommended to
         use '//', instead of '\\'.
       - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
         get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >vim
           set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
       <
       See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
       If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >vim
       	set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
       <	You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
       home directory for this to work properly.
       The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
       directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
       uses another default.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = 'nodefault',
     full_name = 'backupdir',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('list of directories for the backup file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bdir',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bex',
     cb = 'did_set_backupext_or_patchmode',
     defaults = '~',
     desc = [=[
       String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
       backup file.  The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
       accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
       prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
       ".bak" that you want to keep.
       Only normal file name characters can be used; `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.

       If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
       autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
       include a timestamp. >vim
       	au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' .. strftime("%Y%b%d%X") .. '~'
       <	Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'backupext',
     normal_fname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('extension used for the backup file'),
     tags = { 'E589' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bex',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bsk',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = [["$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
       Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
       Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"]],
       meta = '/tmp/*',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A list of file patterns.  When one of the patterns matches with the
       name of the file which is written, no backup file is created.  Both
       the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
       The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
       Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
       When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
       default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

       WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
       your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
       lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
       backups if you don't care about losing the file.

       Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
       $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >vim
       	let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') .. '/tmp/*'

       <	Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
       backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
       the newly created file).  Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'backupskip',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('no backup for files that match these patterns'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bsk',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bo',
     defaults = 'all',
     values = {
       'all',
       'backspace',
       'cursor',
       'complete',
       'copy',
       'ctrlg',
       'error',
       'esc',
       'ex',
       'hangul',
       'insertmode',
       'lang',
       'mess',
       'showmatch',
       'operator',
       'register',
       'shell',
       'spell',
       'term',
       'wildmode',
     },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung.  It is a comma-
       separated list of items.  For each item that is present, the bell will
       be silenced.  This is most useful to specify specific events in insert
       mode to be silenced.
       You can also make it flash by using 'visualbell'.

       item	    meaning when present	~
       all	    All events.
       backspace   When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an
       	    error.
       cursor	    Fail to move around using the cursor keys or
       	    <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|.
       complete    Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or
       	    |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.
       copy	    Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or
       	    |i_CTRL-E|.
       ctrlg	    Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode.
       error	    Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line)
       	    (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|).
       esc	    hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|.
       hangul	    Ignored.
       lang	    Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL.
       mess	    No output available for |g<|.
       showmatch   Error occurred for 'showmatch' function.
       operator    Empty region error |cpo-E|.
       register    Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|.
       shell	    Bell from shell output |:!|.
       spell	    Error happened on spell suggest.
       term	    Bell from |:terminal| output.
       wildmode    More matches in |cmdline-completion| available
       	    (depends on the 'wildmode' setting).

       This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should
       be rung.  For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to
       indicate that an error occurred.  It can be silenced by adding the
       "error" keyword.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'belloff',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('do not ring the bell for these reasons'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bo',
     flags_varname = 'bo_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bin',
     cb = 'did_set_binary',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       This option should be set before editing a binary file.  You can also
       use the |-b| Vim argument.  When this option is switched on a few
       options will be changed (also when it already was on):
       	'textwidth'  will be set to 0
       	'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
       	'modeline'   will be off
       	'expandtab'  will be off
       Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
       file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
       separates lines).
       The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
       file is read without conversion.
       NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
       on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
       'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing.  You might want to set
       'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
       The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
       'bin' is switched from on to off.  Each buffer has its own set of
       saved option values.
       To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
       This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
       files you edit.
       When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
       there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
       the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer).  See
       the 'endofline' option.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'binary',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('read/write/edit file in binary mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_bin',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
       Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
       - this option is on
       - the 'binary' option is off
       - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
         endian variants.
       Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
       Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows.  For other applications it
       causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
       appear halfway through the resulting file.  Gcc doesn't accept a BOM.
       When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
       check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
       Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
       don't see it when editing.  When you don't change the options, the BOM
       will be restored when writing the file.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'bomb',
     no_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('a Byte Order Mark to the file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_bomb',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'brk',
     cb = 'did_set_breakat',
     defaults = {
       if_true = ' \t!@*-+;:,./?',
       doc = '" ^I!@*-+;:,./?"',
     },
     flags = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
       break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII characters.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'breakat',
     list = 'flags',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('characters that may cause a line break'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_breakat',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bri',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of
       space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal
       blocks of text.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'breakindent',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('wrapped line repeats indent'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'briopt',
     cb = 'did_set_breakindentopt',
     defaults = '',
     -- Keep this in sync with briopt_check().
     values = { 'shift:', 'min:', 'sbr', 'list:', 'column:' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Settings for 'breakindent'.  It can consist of the following optional
       items and must be separated by a comma:
       	min:{n}	    Minimum text width that will be kept after
       		    applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting
       		    text should normally be narrower.  This prevents
       		    text indented almost to the right window border
       		    occupying lots of vertical space when broken.
       		    (default: 20)
       	shift:{n}   After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's
       		    beginning will be shifted by the given number of
       		    characters.  It permits dynamic French paragraph
       		    indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line
       		    continuation (positive).
       		    (default: 0)
       	sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the
       		    additional indent.
       		    (default: off)
       	list:{n}    Adds an additional indent for lines that match a
       		    numbered or bulleted list (using the
       		    'formatlistpat' setting).
       		    (default: 0)
       	list:-1	    Uses the width of a match with 'formatlistpat' for
       		    indentation.
       	column:{n}  Indent at column {n}.  Will overrule the other
       		    sub-options.  Note: an additional indent may be
       		    added for the 'showbreak' setting.
       		    (default: off)
     ]=],
     full_name = 'breakindentopt',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_("settings for 'breakindent'"),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bsdir',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = '"last"',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Which directory to use for the file browser:
          last		Use same directory as with last file browser, where a
       		file was opened or saved.
          buffer	Use the directory of the related buffer.
          current	Use the current directory.
          {path}	Use the specified directory
     ]=],
     full_name = 'browsedir',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('which directory to start browsing in'),
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bh',
     cb = 'did_set_bufhidden',
     defaults = '',
     values = { '', 'hide', 'unload', 'delete', 'wipe' },
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
       displayed in a window:
         <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
         hide		hide the buffer (don't unload it), even if 'hidden' is
       		not set
         unload	unload the buffer, even if 'hidden' is set; the
       		|:hide| command will also unload the buffer
         delete	delete the buffer from the buffer list, even if
       		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also delete
       		the buffer, making it behave like |:bdelete|
         wipe		wipe the buffer from the buffer list, even if
       		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also wipe
       		out the buffer, making it behave like |:bwipeout|

       CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
       are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
       that switch between buffers temporarily.
       This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
       special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'bufhidden',
     noglob = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('what to do when buffer is no longer in window'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bl',
     cb = 'did_set_buflisted',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list.  If
       it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
       This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
       a file name or marks.  Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
       But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'buflisted',
     noglob = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('whether the buffer shows up in the buffer list'),
     tags = { 'E85' },
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_bl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'bt',
     cb = 'did_set_buftype',
     defaults = '',
     values = {
       '',
       'acwrite',
       'help',
       'nofile',
       'nowrite',
       'quickfix',
       'terminal',
       'prompt',
     },
     desc = [=[
       The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
         <empty>	normal buffer
         acwrite	buffer will always be written with |BufWriteCmd|s
         help		help buffer (do not set this manually)
         nofile	buffer is not related to a file, will not be written
         nowrite	buffer will not be written
         prompt	buffer where only the last section can be edited, for
       		use by plugins. |prompt-buffer|
         quickfix	list of errors |:cwindow| or locations |:lwindow|
         terminal	|terminal-emulator| buffer

       This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
       specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
       Also see |win_gettype()|, which returns the type of the window.

       Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
       One such effect is that Vim will not check the timestamp of the file,
       if the file is changed by another program this will not be noticed.

       A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location
       list.  This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and
       you are not supposed to change it.

       "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
       both:		The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
       		work (":w filename" does work though).
       both:		The buffer is never considered to be 'modified'.
       		There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
       		example when you quit Vim.
       both:		A swap file is only created when using too much memory
       		(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
       		file).
       nofile only:	The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
       		file name.  It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
       		command.
       both:		When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname"
       		the buffer is made empty and autocommands are
       		triggered as usual for |:edit|.
       						*E676*
       "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
       "nofile", but it will be written.  Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
       "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
       without saving.  For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
       |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'buftype',
     noglob = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     tags = { 'E382' },
     short_desc = N_('special type of buffer'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_bt',
   },
   {
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Sets a buffer "busy" status. Indicated in the default statusline.
       When busy status is larger then 0 busy flag is shown in statusline.
       The semantics of "busy" are arbitrary, typically decided by the plugin that owns the buffer.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'busy',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     noglob = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('buffer is busy'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_busy',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cmp',
     defaults = 'internal,keepascii',
     values = { 'internal', 'keepascii' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
       these words, separated by a comma:
       internal	Use internal case mapping functions, the current
       		locale does not change the case mapping. When
       		"internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
       		system library functions are used when available.
       keepascii	For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
       		case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
       		This probably only matters for Turkish.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'casemap',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('specifies how case of letters is changed'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cmp',
     flags_varname = 'cmp_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cdh',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = true,
       if_true = false,
       doc = [[on on Unix, off on Windows]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       When on, |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| without an argument changes the
       current working directory to the |$HOME| directory like in Unix.
       When off, those commands just print the current directory name.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cdhome',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_(':cd without argument goes to the home directory'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_cdh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cd',
     defaults = {
       if_true = ',,',
       doc = 'equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,"',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
       |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being
       searched for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with
       "/", "./" or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then.
       The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
       'path'.  Also see |file-searching|.
       The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
       in the current directory first.
       If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
       a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
       override it: >vim
         let &cdpath = ',' .. substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
       <	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
       (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'cdpath',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('list of directories searched with ":cd"'),
     tags = { 'E344', 'E346' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cdpath',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_cedit',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('CTRL_F_STR', 'string'),
       doc = 'CTRL-F',
     },
     desc = [=[
       The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
       Only non-printable keys are allowed.
       The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
       type.  The preferred way is to use |key-notation| (e.g. <Up>, <C-F>) or
       a letter preceded with a caret (e.g. `^F` is CTRL-F).  Examples: >vim
       	set cedit=^Y
       	set cedit=<Esc>
       <	|Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
       See |cmdwin|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cedit',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('used to open the command-line window'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cedit',
   },
   {
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       |channel| connected to the buffer, or 0 if no channel is connected.
       In a |:terminal| buffer this is the terminal channel.
       Read-only.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'channel',
     no_mkrc = true,
     nodefault = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('Channel connected to the buffer'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_channel',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ccv',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
       evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
       different encoding from what is desired.
       'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
       supported and is able to do the conversion.  Using iconv() is
       preferred, because it is much faster.
       'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
       file to convert from.  You will have to save the text in a file first.
       The expression must return zero, false or an empty string for success,
       non-zero or true for failure.
       See |encoding-names| for possible encoding names.
       Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
       used.
       Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
       is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
       Also used for Unicode conversion.
       Example: >vim
       	set charconvert=CharConvert()
       	fun CharConvert()
       	  system("recode "
       		\ .. v:charconvert_from .. ".." .. v:charconvert_to
       		\ .. " <" .. v:fname_in .. " >" .. v:fname_out)
       	  return v:shell_error
       	endfun
       <	The related Vim variables are:
       	v:charconvert_from	name of the current encoding
       	v:charconvert_to	name of the desired encoding
       	v:fname_in		name of the input file
       	v:fname_out		name of the output file
       Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.

       The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
       faster, see |expr-option-function|.

       If the 'charconvert' expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is
       replaced with the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
       	set charconvert=s:MyConvert()
       	set charconvert=<SID>SomeConvert()
       <	Otherwise the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
       where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'charconvert',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('expression for character encoding conversion'),
     type = 'string',
     tags = { 'E202', 'E214', 'E513' },
     varname = 'p_ccv',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'chi',
     cb = 'did_set_xhistory',
     defaults = 10,
     desc = [=[
       Number of quickfix lists that should be remembered for the quickfix
       stack.  Must be between 1 and 100.  If the option is set to a value
       that is lower than the amount of entries in the quickfix list stack,
       entries will be removed starting from the oldest one.  If the current
       quickfix list was removed, then the quickfix list at top of the stack
       (the most recently created) will be used in its place.  For additional
       info, see |quickfix-stack|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'chistory',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of quickfix lists stored in history'),
     tags = { 'E1542', 'E1543' },
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_chi',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cin',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Enables automatic C program indenting.  See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
       that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
       preferred indent style.
       If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
       If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
       the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
       external program.
       See |C-indenting|.
       When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
       option or 'indentexpr'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cindent',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('do C program indenting'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_cin',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cink',
     defaults = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
       the current line.  Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
       empty.
       For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
       See |C-indenting|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cinkeys',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("keys that trigger indent when 'cindent' is set"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cink',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cino',
     cb = 'did_set_cinoptions',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
       program.  See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
       |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cinoptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("how to do indenting when 'cindent' is set"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cino',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cinsd',
     defaults = 'public,protected,private',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Keywords that are interpreted as a C++ scope declaration by |cino-g|.
       Useful e.g. for working with the Qt framework that defines additional
       scope declarations "signals", "public slots" and "private slots": >vim
       	set cinscopedecls+=signals,public\ slots,private\ slots
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cinscopedecls',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("words that are recognized by 'cino-g'"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cinsd',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cinw',
     defaults = 'if,else,while,do,for,switch',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
       'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set.  For 'cindent' this is only done at
       an appropriate place (inside {}).
       Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'.  If case doesn't
       matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
       "if,If,IF".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cinwords',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("words where 'si' and 'cin' add an indent"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cinw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cb',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'unnamed', 'unnamedplus' },
     flags = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option is a list of comma-separated names.
       These names are recognized:

       					*clipboard-unnamed*
       unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register "*"
       		for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
       		would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
       		register is explicitly specified, it will always be
       		used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
       		or not.  The clipboard register can always be
       		explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
       		|clipboard|.

       					*clipboard-unnamedplus*
       unnamedplus	A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the
       		clipboard register "+" (|quoteplus|) instead of
       		register "*" for all yank, delete, change and put
       		operations which would normally go to the unnamed
       		register.  When "unnamed" is also included to the
       		option, yank and delete operations (but not put)
       		will additionally copy the text into register
       		"*". See |clipboard|.
     ]=],
     deny_duplicates = true,
     full_name = 'clipboard',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('use the clipboard as the unnamed register'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cb',
     flags_varname = 'cb_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ch',
     cb = 'did_set_cmdheight',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
       |hit-enter| prompts.
       The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab
       page can have a different value.

       When 'cmdheight' is zero, there is no command-line unless it is being
       used.  The command-line will cover the last line of the screen when
       shown.

       WARNING: `cmdheight=0` is EXPERIMENTAL. Expect some unwanted behaviour.
       Some 'shortmess' flags and similar mechanism might fail to take effect,
       causing unwanted hit-enter prompts.  Some informative messages, both
       from Nvim itself and plugins, will not be displayed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cmdheight',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of lines to use for the command-line'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ch',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cwh',
     defaults = 7,
     desc = [=[
       Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cmdwinheight',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('height of the command-line window'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_cwh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cc',
     cb = 'did_set_colorcolumn',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       'colorcolumn' is a comma-separated list of screen columns that are
       highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|.  Useful to align
       text.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
       The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with
       '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. >vim

       	set cc=+1	  " highlight column after 'textwidth'
       	set cc=+1,+2,+3  " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'
       	hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey
       <
       When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.
       A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'colorcolumn',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('columns to highlight'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'co',
     cb = 'did_set_lines_or_columns',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('DFLT_COLS', 'number'),
       doc = '80 or terminal width',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Number of columns of the screen.  Normally this is set by the terminal
       initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
       When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
       option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
       to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |ginit.vim| file.
       When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
       number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.  For
       the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to
       what fits on the screen.  You can use this command to get the widest
       window possible: >vim
       	set columns=9999
       <	Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'columns',
     no_mkrc = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of columns in the display'),
     tags = { 'E594' },
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_columns',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'com',
     cb = 'did_set_comments',
     defaults = 's1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-,fb:•',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of strings that can start a comment line.  See
       |format-comments|.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
       insert a space.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'comments',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('patterns that can start a comment line'),
     tags = { 'E524', 'E525' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_com',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cms',
     cb = 'did_set_commentstring',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       A template for a comment.  The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
       comment text, and should be padded with a space when possible.
       Used for |commenting| and to add markers for folding, see |fold-marker|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'commentstring',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('template for comments; used for fold marker'),
     tags = { 'E537' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cms',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cp',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'compatible',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cpt',
     cb = 'did_set_complete',
     defaults = '.,w,b,u,t',
     values = { '.', 'w', 'b', 'u', 'k', 'kspell', 's', 'i', 'd', ']', 't', 'U', 'f', 'F', 'o' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option controls how completion |ins-completion| behaves when
       using CTRL-P, CTRL-N, or |ins-autocompletion|.  It is also used for
       whole-line completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of
       completion and the places to scan.  It is a comma-separated list of
       flags:
       .	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
       w	scan buffers from other windows
       b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
       u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
       U	scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
       k	scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
       kspell  use the currently active spell checking |spell|
       k{dict}	scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
       	patterns are valid too.  For example: >vim
       		set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
       <	s	scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
       s{tsr}	scan the file {tsr}.  Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
       	are valid too.
       i	scan current and included files
       d	scan current and included files for defined name or macro
       	|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
       ]	tag completion
       t	same as "]"
       f	scan the buffer names (as opposed to buffer contents)
       F{func}	call the function {func}.  Multiple "F" flags may be
       	specified.  Refer to |complete-functions| for details on how
       	the function is invoked and what it should return.  The value
       	can be the name of a function or a |Funcref|.  For |Funcref|
       	values, spaces must be escaped with a backslash ('\'), and
       	commas with double backslashes ('\\') (see |option-backslash|).
       	Unlike other sources, functions can provide completions
       	starting from a non-keyword character before the cursor, and
       	their start position for replacing text may differ from other
       	sources.  If the Dict returned by the {func} includes
       	`{"refresh": "always"}`, the function will be invoked again
       	whenever the leading text changes.
       	If generating matches is potentially slow, call
       	|complete_check()| periodically to keep Vim responsive.  This
       	is especially important for |ins-autocompletion|.
       F	equivalent to using "F{func}", where the function is taken
       	from the 'completefunc' option.
       o	equivalent to using "F{func}", where the function is taken
       	from the 'omnifunc' option.

       Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
       not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
       (gzipped files for example).  Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
       whole-line completion.

       CTRL-N, CTRL-P, and |ins-autocompletion| can be used for any
       'iskeyword'-based completion (dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included
       patterns |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|, and normal
       expansions).  With the "F" and "o" flags in 'complete', non-keywords
       can also be completed.

       An optional match limit can be specified for a completion source by
       appending a caret ("^") followed by a {count} to the source flag.
       For example: ".^9,w,u,t^5" limits matches from the current buffer to 9
       and from tags to 5.  Other sources remain unlimited.
       Note: The match limit takes effect only during forward completion
       (CTRL-N) and is ignored during backward completion (CTRL-P).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'complete',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('specify how Insert mode completion works'),
     tags = { 'E535' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cpt',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cfu',
     cb = 'did_set_completefunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion
       with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
       See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
       invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
       function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for
       more information.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'completefunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('function to be used for Insert mode completion'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cfu',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cia',
     cb = 'did_set_completeitemalign',
     defaults = 'abbr,kind,menu',
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of strings that controls the alignment and
       display order of items in the popup menu during Insert mode
       completion.  The supported values are "abbr", "kind", and "menu".
       These values allow customizing how |complete-items| are shown in the
       popup menu.  Note: must always contain those three values in any
       order.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'completeitemalign',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Insert mode completion item align order'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cia',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cot',
     cb = 'did_set_completeopt',
     defaults = 'menu,popup',
     values = {
       'menu',
       'menuone',
       'longest',
       'preview',
       'popup',
       'noinsert',
       'noselect',
       'fuzzy',
       'nosort',
       'preinsert',
       'nearest',
     },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of options for Insert mode completion
       |ins-completion|.  The supported values are:

          fuzzy    Enable |fuzzy-matching| for completion candidates.  This
       	    allows for more flexible and intuitive matching, where
       	    characters can be skipped and matches can be found even
       	    if the exact sequence is not typed (disabled for thesaurus
       	    completion |compl-thesaurus|).

          longest
       	    When 'autocomplete' is not active, only the longest common
       	    prefix of the matches is inserted (disabled for thesaurus
       	    completion |compl-thesaurus|).  If the popup menu is
       	    displayed, you can use CTRL-L to add more characters.
       	    Whether case is ignored depends on the type of completion.
       	    For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option applies.

       	    When 'autocomplete' is active and no completion item is
       	    selected, the longest common prefix of the matches is
       	    inserted after the cursor.  The prefix is taken either
       	    from all displayed items or only from items in the current
       	    buffer.  The inserted text is highlighted with
       	    |hl-PreInsert|, and the cursor position does not change
       	    (similar to `"preinsert"`).  Press CTRL-Y to accept.
       	    See also |preinserted()|.

          menu	    Use a popup menu to show the possible completions.  The
       	    menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
       	    sufficient colors are available.  |ins-completion-menu|

          menuone  Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.
       	    Useful when there is additional information about the
       	    match, e.g., what file it comes from.

          nearest  Matches are listed based on their proximity to the cursor
       	    position, unlike the default behavior, which only
       	    considers proximity for matches appearing below the
       	    cursor.  This applies only to matches from the current
       	    buffer.  No effect if "fuzzy" is present.

          noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects
       	    a match from the menu.  Only works in combination with
       	    "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present.

          noselect Same as "noinsert", except that no menu item is
       	    pre-selected.  If both "noinsert" and "noselect" are
       	    present, "noselect" takes precedence.  This is enabled
       	    automatically when 'autocomplete' is on, unless
       	    "preinsert" is also enabled.

          nosort   Disable sorting of completion candidates based on fuzzy
       	    scores when "fuzzy" is enabled.  Candidates will appear
       	    in their original order.

          popup    Show extra information about the currently selected
       	    completion in a popup window.  Only works in combination
       	    with "menu" or "menuone".  Overrides "preview".

          preinsert
       	    Inserts the text of the first completion candidate beyond
       	    the current leader, highlighted with |hl-PreInsert|.
       	    The cursor does not move.
       	    Requires "fuzzy" to be unset, and either "menuone" in
       	    'completeopt' or 'autocomplete' enabled.  When
       	    'autocomplete' is enabled, this does not work if
       	    'ignorecase' is set without 'infercase'.
       	    See also |preinserted()|.

          preview  Show extra information about the currently selected
       	    completion in the preview window.  Only works in
       	    combination with "menu" or "menuone".

       Only "fuzzy", "longest", "popup", "preinsert" and "preview" have an
       effect when 'autocomplete' is enabled.

       This option does not apply to |cmdline-completion|.  See 'wildoptions'
       for that.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'completeopt',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('options for Insert mode completion'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cot',
     flags_varname = 'cot_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'csl',
     cb = 'did_set_completeslash',
     defaults = '',
     values = { '', 'slash', 'backslash' },
     desc = [=[
       		only modifiable in MS-Windows
       When this option is set it overrules 'shellslash' for completion:
       - When this option is set to "slash", a forward slash is used for path
         completion in insert mode.  This is useful when editing HTML tag, or
         Makefile with 'noshellslash' on MS-Windows.
       - When this option is set to "backslash", backslash is used.  This is
         useful when editing a batch file with 'shellslash' set on
         MS-Windows.
       - When this option is empty, same character is used as for
         'shellslash'.
       For Insert mode completion the buffer-local value is used.  For
       command line completion the global value is used.
     ]=],
     enable_if = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
     full_name = 'completeslash',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_csl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cto',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Like 'autocompletetimeout', but applies to |i_CTRL-N| and |i_CTRL-P|
       completion.  Value of 0 disables the timeout; positive values allowed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'completetimeout',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('initial decay timeout for CTRL-N and CTRL-P'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_cto',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cocu',
     cb = 'did_set_concealcursor',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.
       When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in
       other lines.
         n		Normal mode
         v		Visual mode
         i		Insert mode
         c		Command line editing, for 'incsearch'

       'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.
       A useful value is "nc".  This is used in help files.  So long as you
       are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text
       or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that
       you can see what you are doing.
       Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's
       displayed.  E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_concealcursor',
     full_name = 'concealcursor',
     list = 'flags',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('whether concealable text is hidden in cursor line'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cole',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal|
       is shown:

       Value		Effect ~
       0		Text is shown normally
       1		Each block of concealed text is replaced with one
       		character.  If the syntax item does not have a custom
       		replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the
       		character defined in 'listchars' is used.
       		It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.
       2		Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a
       		custom replacement character defined (see
       		|:syn-cchar|).
       3		Concealed text is completely hidden.

       Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can
       edit and copy the text.  This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'
       option.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'conceallevel',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('whether concealable text is shown or hidden'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cf',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
       fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
       instead raise a dialog asking if you wish to save the current
       file(s).  You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
       If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
       command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
       command.
       Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'confirm',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('ask what to do about unsaved/read-only files'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_confirm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ci',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
       new line.  Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
       tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is enabled,
       in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option makes the
       new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
       existing line.  'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab
       remains a Tab.  If the new indent is greater than on the existing
       line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
       See 'preserveindent'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'copyindent',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("make 'autoindent' use existing indent structure"),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ci',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cpo',
     cb = 'did_set_cpoptions',
     defaults = macros('CPO_VIM', 'string'),
     desc = [=[
       A sequence of single character flags.  When a character is present
       this indicates Vi-compatible behavior.  This is used for things where
       not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
       'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
       Commas can be added for readability.
       To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
       "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

           contains	behavior	~
       							*cpo-a*
       	a	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
       		argument will set the alternate file name for the
       		current window.
       							*cpo-A*
       	A	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
       		argument will set the alternate file name for the
       		current window.
       							*cpo-b*
       	b	"\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
       		the map command.  The '\' is included in the mapping,
       		the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
       		command.  Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
       		include the '|' in the mapping.  Applies to all
       		mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
       		See also |map_bar|.
       							*cpo-B*
       	B	A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
       		abbreviations, user commands and the "to" part of the
       		menu commands.  Remove this flag to be able to use a
       		backslash like a CTRL-V.  For example, the command
       		":map X \\<Esc>" results in X being mapped to:
       			'B' included:	"\^["	 (^[ is a real <Esc>)
       			'B' excluded:	"<Esc>"  (5 characters)
       							*cpo-c*
       	c	Searching continues at the end of any match at the
       		cursor position, but not further than the start of the
       		next line.  When not present searching continues
       		one character from the cursor position.  With 'c'
       		"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
       		"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
       							*cpo-C*
       	C	Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
       		backslash.  See |line-continuation|.
       							*cpo-d*
       	d	Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
       		the tags file relative to the current file, but the
       		tags file in the current directory.
       							*cpo-D*
       	D	Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
       		commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
       		|t|.
       							*cpo-e*
       	e	When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
       		<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
       		linewise.  If this flag is not present, the register
       		is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
       		<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
       		and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
       							*cpo-E*
       	E	It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
       		"gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
       		at least one character is to be operated on.  Example:
       		This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
       							*cpo-f*
       	f	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
       		argument will set the file name for the current
       		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
       		yet.
       							*cpo-F*
       	F	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
       		argument will set the file name for the current
       		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
       		yet.  Also see |cpo-P|.
       							*cpo-i*
       	i	When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
       		leave it modified.
       							*cpo-I*
       	I	When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
       		indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
       							*cpo-J*
       	J	A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
       		the '.', '!' or '?'.  A <Tab> is not recognized as
       		white space.
       							*cpo-K*
       	K	Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
       		halfway through a mapping.  This breaks mapping
       		<F1><F1> when only part of the second <F1> has been
       		read.  It enables cancelling the mapping by typing
       		<F1><Esc>.
       							*cpo-l*
       	l	Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
       		literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
       		See |/[]|
       		   'l' included: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
       		   'l' excluded: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space> and <Tab>
       							*cpo-L*
       	L	When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
       		'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
       		(see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
       		the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
       							*cpo-m*
       	m	When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
       		second.  When not included, a showmatch will wait half
       		a second or until a character is typed.  'showmatch'
       							*cpo-M*
       	M	When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
       		account.  Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
       		parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
       		backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
       							*cpo-n*
       	n	When included, the column used for 'number' and
       		'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped
       		lines.
       							*cpo-o*
       	o	Line offset to search command is not remembered for
       		next search.
       							*cpo-O*
       	O	Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
       		when it didn't exist when editing it.  This is a
       		protection against a file unexpectedly created by
       		someone else.  Vi didn't complain about this.
       							*cpo-P*
       	P	When included, a ":write" command that appends to a
       		file will set the file name for the current buffer, if
       		the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and
       		the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|.
       							*cpo-q*
       	q	When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
       		position where it would be when joining two lines.
       							*cpo-r*
       	r	Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
       		command, instead of the actually used search string.
       							*cpo-R*
       	R	Remove marks from filtered lines.  Without this flag
       		marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
       							*cpo-s*
       	s	Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
       		first time.  This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
       		And it is the default.  If not present the options are
       		set when the buffer is created.
       							*cpo-S*
       	S	Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
       		(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
       		'syntax').  This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
       		The options are set to the values in the current
       		buffer.  When you change an option and go to another
       		buffer, the value is copied.  Effectively makes the
       		buffer options global to all buffers.

       		's'    'S'     copy buffer options
       		no     no      when buffer created
       		yes    no      when buffer first entered (default)
       		 X     yes     each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
       							*cpo-t*
       	t	Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
       		"n" command.  Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
       		the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
       		last used search pattern.
       							*cpo-u*
       	u	Undo is Vi compatible.  See |undo-two-ways|.
       							*cpo-v*
       	v	Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
       		Insert mode.  Without this flag the characters are
       		erased from the screen right away.  With this flag the
       		screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
       		characters.
       							*cpo-W*
       	W	Don't overwrite a readonly file.  When omitted, ":w!"
       		overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
       							*cpo-x*
       	x	<Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
       		The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
       		because <Esc> normally aborts a command.  |c_<Esc>|
       							*cpo-X*
       	X	When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
       		deleted only once.  Also when repeating "R" with "."
       		and a count.
       							*cpo-y*
       	y	A yank command can be redone with ".".  Think twice if
       		you really want to use this, it may break some
       		plugins, since most people expect "." to only repeat a
       		change.
       							*cpo-Z*
       	Z	When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
       		don't reset 'readonly'.
       							*cpo-!*
       	!	When redoing a filter command, use the last used
       		external command, whatever it was.  Otherwise the last
       		used -filter- command is used.
       							*cpo-$*
       	$	When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
       		line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
       		The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
       		new text.  The line is redisplayed if you type any
       		command that moves the cursor from the insertion
       		point.
       							*cpo-%*
       	%	Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
       		Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
       		Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
       		Parens inside single and double quotes are also
       		counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
       		disturb the matching.  For example, in a line like
       		"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
       		match the last one.  When this flag is not included,
       		parens inside single and double quotes are treated
       		specially.  When matching a paren outside of quotes,
       		everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
       		paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
       		there is one).  This works very well for C programs.
       		This flag is also used for other features, such as
       		C-indenting.
       							*cpo-+*
       	+	When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
       		'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
       		itself may still be different from its file.
       							*cpo->*
       	>	When appending to a register, put a line break before
       		the appended text.
       							*cpo-;*
       	;	When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search
       		and the cursor is right in front of the searched
       		character, the cursor won't move.  When not included,
       		the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
       		following occurrence.
       							*cpo-~*
       	~	When included, don't resolve symbolic links when
       		changing directory with |:cd|, |:lcd|, or |:tcd|.
       		This preserves the symbolic link path in buffer names
       		and when displaying the current directory.  When
       		excluded (default), symbolic links are resolved to
       		their target paths.
       							*cpo-_*
       	_	When using |cw| on a word, do not include the
       		whitespace following the word in the motion.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_cpoptions',
     full_name = 'cpoptions',
     list = 'flags',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('flags for Vi-compatible behavior'),
     tags = { 'cpo' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_cpo',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'crb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
       window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
       this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
       column.  This option is useful for viewing the
       differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,
       inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are
       taken into account.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cursorbind',
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('move cursor in window as it moves in other windows'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cuc',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
       |hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
       slower.
       If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use
       these autocommands: >vim
       	au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn
       	au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cursorcolumn',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('highlight the screen column of the cursor'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'cul',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Highlight the text line of the cursor with CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
       Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
       When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it
       easier to see the selected text.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cursorline',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('highlight the screen line of the cursor'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'culopt',
     cb = 'did_set_cursorlineopt',
     defaults = 'both',
     -- Keep this in sync with fill_culopt_flags().
     values = { 'line', 'screenline', 'number', 'both' },
     flags = {
       Line = 0x01,
       Screenline = 0x02,
       Number = 0x04,
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Comma-separated list of settings for how 'cursorline' is displayed.
       Valid values:
       "line"		Highlight the text line of the cursor with
       		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
       "screenline"	Highlight only the screen line of the cursor with
       		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
       "number"	Highlight the line number of the cursor with
       		CursorLineNr |hl-CursorLineNr|.

       Special value:
       "both"		Alias for the values "line,number".

       "line" and "screenline" cannot be used together.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'cursorlineopt',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_("settings for 'cursorline'"),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'msg', 'throw', 'beep' },
     desc = [=[
       These values can be used:
       msg	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
       	anyway.
       throw	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
       	anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|.
       beep	A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be
       	produced.
       The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
       "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or
       'indentexpr'.
     ]=],
     -- TODO(lewis6991): bug, values currently cannot be combined
     full_name = 'debug',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('to "msg" to see all error messages'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_debug',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'def',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Pattern to be used to find a macro definition.  It is a search
       pattern, just like for the "/" command.  This option is used for the
       commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|.  The 'isident' option is
       used to recognize the defined name after the match: >
       	{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
       <	See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
       or backslash.
       For C++ this value would be useful, to include const type declarations: >
       	^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
       <	You can also use "\ze" just before the name and continue the pattern
       to check what is following.  E.g. for Javascript, if a function is
       defined with `func_name = function(args)`: >
       	^\s*\ze\i\+\s*=\s*function(
       <	If the function is defined with `func_name : function() {...`: >
               ^\s*\ze\i\+\s*[:]\s*(*function\s*(
       <	When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
       To avoid that use `:let` with a single quote string: >vim
       	let &l:define = '^\s*\ze\k\+\s*=\s*function('
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'define',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('pattern to be used to find a macro definition'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_def',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'deco',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
       "x" delete each combining character on its own.  When it is off (the
       default) the character along with its combining characters are
       deleted.
       Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work differently from "2x"!

       This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
       may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
       to remove only the combining ones.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'delcombine',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('delete combining characters on their own'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_deco',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dict',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
       for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|.  Each file should
       contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
       words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
       preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.

       When this option is empty or an entry "spell" is present, and spell
       checking is enabled, words in the word lists for the currently active
       'spelllang' are used.  See |spell|.

       To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
       after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
       name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
       Where to find a list of words?
       - BSD/macOS include the "/usr/share/dict/words" file.
       - Try "apt install spell" to get the "/usr/share/dict/words" file on
         apt-managed systems (Debian/Ubuntu).
       The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
       directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
       uses another default.
       Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'dictionary',
     list = 'onecomma',
     normal_dname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of file names used for keyword completion'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_dict',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_diff',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
       between files.  See |diff-mode|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'diff',
     noglob = true,
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('diff mode for the current window'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dia',
     cb = 'did_set_diffanchors',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       List of {address} in each buffer, separated by commas, that are
       considered anchors when used for diffing.  It's valid to specify "$+1"
       for 1 past the last line.  "%" cannot be used for this option.  There
       can be at most 20 anchors set for each buffer.

       Each anchor line splits the buffer (the split happens above the
       anchor), with each part being diff'ed separately before the final
       result is joined.  When more than one {address} are provided, the
       anchors will be sorted internally by line number.  If using buffer
       local options, each buffer should have the same number of anchors
       (extra anchors will be ignored).  This option is only used when
       'diffopt' has "anchor" set.  See |diff-anchors| for more details and
       examples.
       							*E1550*
       If some of the {address} do not resolve to a line in each buffer (e.g.
       a pattern search that does not match anything), none of the anchors
       will be used.
       							*E1562*
       Diff anchors can only be used when there are no hidden diff buffers.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'diffanchors',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of addresses for anchoring a diff'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_dia',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dex',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Expression which is evaluated to obtain a diff file (either ed-style
       or unified-style) from two versions of a file.  See |diff-diffexpr|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'diffexpr',
     redraw = { 'curswant' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('expression used to obtain a diff file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_dex',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dip',
     cb = 'did_set_diffopt',
     defaults = 'internal,filler,closeoff,indent-heuristic,inline:char,linematch:40',
     -- Keep this in sync with diffopt_changed().
     values = {
       'filler',
       'anchor',
       'context:',
       'iblank',
       'icase',
       'iwhite',
       'iwhiteall',
       'iwhiteeol',
       'horizontal',
       'vertical',
       'closeoff',
       'hiddenoff',
       'foldcolumn:',
       'followwrap',
       'internal',
       'indent-heuristic',
       { 'algorithm:', { 'myers', 'minimal', 'patience', 'histogram' } },
       { 'inline:', { 'none', 'simple', 'char', 'word' } },
       'linematch:',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Option settings for diff mode.  It can consist of the following items.
       All are optional.  Items must be separated by a comma.

       	algorithm:{text} Use the specified diff algorithm with the
       			internal diff engine.  Currently supported
       			algorithms are:
       			myers      the default algorithm
       			minimal    spend extra time to generate the
       				   smallest possible diff
       			patience   patience diff algorithm
       			histogram  histogram diff algorithm

       	anchor		Anchor specific lines in each buffer to be
       			aligned with each other if 'diffanchors' is
       			set.  See |diff-anchors|.

       	closeoff	When a window is closed where 'diff' is set
       			and there is only one window remaining in the
       			same tab page with 'diff' set, execute
       			`:diffoff` in that window.  This undoes a
       			`:diffsplit` command.

       	context:{n}	Use a context of {n} lines between a change
       			and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
       			When omitted a context of six lines is used.
       			When using zero the context is actually one,
       			since folds require a line in between, also
       			for a deleted line.  Set it to a very large
       			value (999999) to disable folding completely.
       			See |fold-diff|.

       	filler		Show filler lines, to keep the text
       			synchronized with a window that has inserted
       			lines at the same position.  Mostly useful
       			when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
       			is set.

       	foldcolumn:{n}	Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
       			starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.

       	followwrap	Follow the 'wrap' option and leave as it is.

       	horizontal	Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless
       			explicitly specified otherwise).

       	hiddenoff	Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it
       			becomes hidden.

       	iblank		Ignore changes where lines are all blank.
       			Adds the "-B" flag to the "diff" command if
       			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
       			of the "diff" command for what this does
       			exactly.
       			NOTE: the diff windows will get out of sync,
       			because no differences between blank lines are
       			taken into account.

       	icase		Ignore changes in case of text.  "a" and "A"
       			are considered the same.  Adds the "-i" flag
       			to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.

       	indent-heuristic
       			Use the indent heuristic for the internal
       			diff library.

       	inline:{text}	Highlight inline differences within a change.
       			See |view-diffs|.  Supported values are:

       			none    Do not perform inline highlighting.
       			simple  Highlight from first different
       				character to the last one in each
       				line.  This is the default if no
       				`inline:` value is set.
       			char    Use internal diff to perform a
       				character-wise diff and highlight the
       				difference.
       			word    Use internal diff to perform a
       				|word|-wise diff and highlight the
       				difference.  Non-alphanumeric
       				multi-byte characters such as emoji
       				and CJK characters are considered
       				individual words.

       	internal	Use the internal diff library.  This is
       			ignored when 'diffexpr' is set.  *E960*
       			When running out of memory when writing a
       			buffer or the diff is larger than 1 GB this
       			item will be ignored for diffs involving that
       			buffer.  Set the 'verbose' option to see when
       			this happens.

       	iwhite		Ignore changes in amount of white space.  Adds
       			the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
       			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
       			of the "diff" command for what this does
       			exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
       			white space, but not leading white space.

       	iwhiteall	Ignore all white space changes.  Adds
       			the "-w" flag to the "diff" command if
       			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
       			of the "diff" command for what this does
       			exactly.

       	iwhiteeol	Ignore white space changes at end of line.
       			Adds the "-Z" flag to the "diff" command if
       			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
       			of the "diff" command for what this does
       			exactly.

       	linematch:{n}   Align and mark changes between the most
       			similar lines between the buffers.  When the
       			total number of lines in the diff hunk exceeds
       			{n}, the lines will not be aligned because for
       			very large diff hunks there will be a
       			noticeable lag.  A reasonable setting is
       			"linematch:60", as this will enable alignment
       			for a 2 buffer diff hunk of 30 lines each, or
       			a 3 buffer diff hunk of 20 lines each.
       			Implicitly sets "filler" when this is set.

       	vertical	Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
       			explicitly specified otherwise).

       Examples: >vim
       	set diffopt=internal,filler,context:4
       	set diffopt=
       	set diffopt=internal,filler,foldcolumn:3
       	set diffopt-=internal  " do NOT use the internal diff parser
       <
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_diffopt',
     full_name = 'diffopt',
     list = 'onecommacolon',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('options for using diff mode'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_dip',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dg',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
       {char2}.  See |digraphs|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'digraph',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_dg',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dir',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.

       Possible items:
       - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
         possible.  If it is not possible in any directory, but last
         directory listed in the option does not exist, it is created.
       - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
         impossible!) and no |E303| error will be given.
       - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
         the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
         it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
         attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
       - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
         the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading "."
         is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
       - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
         the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
         with all path separators replaced by percent '%' signs (including
         the colon following the drive letter on Win32).  This will ensure
         file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
         On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
         separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
         include the comma in the file name.  Therefore it is recommended to
         use '//', instead of '\\'.
       - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
         of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
         name, precede it with a backslash.
       - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
       - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
       - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
         get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >vim
           set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
       <
       Editing the same file twice will result in a warning.  Using "/tmp" on
       is discouraged: if the system crashes you lose the swap file. And
       others on the computer may be able to see the files.
       Use |:set+=| and |:set-=| when adding or removing directories from the
       list, this avoids problems if the Nvim default is changed.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = 'nodefault',
     full_name = 'directory',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('list of directory names for the swap file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_dir',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'dy',
     cb = 'did_set_display',
     defaults = 'lastline',
     values = { 'lastline', 'truncate', 'uhex', 'msgsep' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Change the way text is displayed.  This is a comma-separated list of
       flags:
       lastline	When included, as much as possible of the last line
       		in a window will be displayed.  "@@@" is put in the
       		last columns of the last screen line to indicate the
       		rest of the line is not displayed.
       truncate	Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first
       		column of the last screen line.  Overrules "lastline".
       uhex		Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
       		instead of using ^C and ~C.
       msgsep		Obsolete flag. Allowed but takes no effect. |msgsep|

       When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that
       doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.

       The "@" character can be changed by setting the "lastline" item in
       'fillchars'.  The character is highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'display',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('list of flags for how to display text'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_dy',
     flags_varname = 'dy_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ead',
     defaults = 'both',
     values = { 'both', 'ver', 'hor' },
     desc = [=[
       Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
       	ver	vertically, width of windows is not affected
       	hor	horizontally, height of windows is not affected
       	both	width and height of windows is affected
     ]=],
     full_name = 'eadirection',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("in which direction 'equalalways' works"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ead',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ed',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'edcompatible',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'emo',
     cb = 'did_set_emoji',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width.
       This excludes "text emoji" characters, which are normally displayed as
       single width. However, such "text emoji" are treated as full-width
       emoji if they are followed by the U+FE0F variant selector.

       Unfortunately there is no good specification for this and it has been
       determined on trial-and-error basis.  Use the |setcellwidths()|
       function to change the behavior.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'emoji',
     redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('No description'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_emoji',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'enc',
     cb = 'did_set_encoding',
     defaults = macros('ENC_DFLT', 'string'),
     deny_in_modelines = true,
     desc = [=[
       String-encoding used internally and for |RPC| communication.
       Always UTF-8.

       See 'fileencoding' to control file-content encoding.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'encoding',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('encoding used internally'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_enc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'eof',
     cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Indicates that a CTRL-Z character was found at the end of the file
       when reading it.  Normally only happens when 'fileformat' is "dos".
       When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
       is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no CTRL-Z will be written at the
       end of the file.
       See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'endoffile',
     no_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('write CTRL-Z for last line in file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_eof',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'eol',
     cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
       is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the
       last line in the file.  This option is automatically set or reset when
       starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL>
       for the last line in the file.  Normally you don't have to set or
       reset this option.
       When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when
       writing the file.  When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used
       to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so
       that when you write the file the situation from the original file can
       be kept.  But you can change it if you want to.
       See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'endofline',
     no_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('write <EOL> for last line in file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_eol',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ea',
     cb = 'did_set_equalalways',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
       splitting or closing a window.  This also happens the moment the
       option is switched on.  When off, splitting a window will reduce the
       size of the current window and leave the other windows the same.  When
       closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
       (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
       When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
       is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
       'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
       Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting
       'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively.
       If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are
       currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in
       the future).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'equalalways',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('windows are automatically made the same size'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ea',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ep',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       External program to use for "=" command.  When this option is empty
       the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent'
       or 'indentexpr'.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
       about including spaces and backslashes.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'equalprg',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('external program to use for "=" command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ep',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'eb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages.  This only
       makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
       for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
       mode).  See 'visualbell' to make the bell behave like a screen flash
       or do nothing.  See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the bell.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'errorbells',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('ring the bell for error messages'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_eb',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ef',
     defaults = macros('DFLT_ERRORFILE', 'string'),
     desc = [=[
       Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
       When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
       following argument.  See |-q|.
       NOT used for the ":make" command.  See 'makeef' for that.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'errorfile',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ef',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'efm',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('DFLT_EFM', 'string'),
       doc = 'is very long',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
       (see |errorformat|).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'errorformat',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('description of the lines in the error file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_efm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ei',
     cb = 'did_set_eventignore',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
       When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand
       events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.
       Otherwise this is a comma-separated list of event names.  Example: >vim
           set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
       <
       To ignore all but some events, a "-" prefix can be used: >vim
           :set ei=all,-WinLeave
       <
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_eventignore',
     full_name = 'eventignore',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('autocommand events that are ignored'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ei',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'eiw',
     cb = 'did_set_eventignore',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Similar to 'eventignore' but applies to a particular window and its
       buffers, for which window and buffer related autocommands can be
       ignored indefinitely without affecting the global 'eventignore'.

       Note: The following events are considered to happen outside of a
       window context and thus cannot be ignored by 'eventignorewin':

       	<PLACEHOLDER>
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_eventignore',
     full_name = 'eventignorewin',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('autocommand events that are ignored in a window'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'et',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
       <Tab>.  Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
       when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
       on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'expandtab',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('use spaces when <Tab> is inserted'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_et',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ex',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Enables project-local configuration. Nvim will execute any .nvim.lua,
       .nvimrc, or .exrc file found in the |current-directory| and all parent
       directories (ordered upwards), if the files are in the |trust| list.
       Use |:trust| to manage trusted files. See also |vim.secure.read()|.

       Unset 'exrc' to stop further searching of 'exrc' files in parent
       directories, similar to |editorconfig.root|.

       To get its own location, a Lua exrc file can use |debug.getinfo()|.
       See |lua-script-location|.

       Compare 'exrc' to |editorconfig|:
       - 'exrc' can execute any code; editorconfig only specifies settings.
       - 'exrc' is Nvim-specific; editorconfig works in other editors.

       To achieve project-local LSP configuration:
       1. Enable 'exrc'.
       2. Place LSP configs at ".nvim/lsp/*.lua" in your project root.
       3. Create ".nvim.lua" in your project root directory with this line: >lua
           vim.cmd[[set runtimepath+=.nvim]]
       <
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'exrc',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('read project-local configuration in parent directories'),
     tags = { 'project-config', 'workspace-config' },
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_exrc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fenc',
     cb = 'did_set_encoding',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       File-content encoding for the current buffer. Conversion is done with
       iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.

       When 'fileencoding' is not UTF-8, conversion will be done when
       writing the file.  For reading see below.
       When 'fileencoding' is empty, the file will be saved with UTF-8
       encoding (no conversion when reading or writing a file).

       WARNING: Conversion to a non-Unicode encoding can cause loss of
       information!

       See |encoding-names| for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
       specified that can be handled by the converter, see
       |mbyte-conversion|.

       When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
       To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
       'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.  One exception: when
       'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.
       For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.

       Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
       When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
       you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
       replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list at
       |encoding-names|, it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
       "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".

       When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
       option is set, because the file would be different when written.

       Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens
       AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be
       written.  If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set
       'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".

       This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
     full_name = 'fileencoding',
     no_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines', 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('file encoding for multi-byte text'),
     tags = { 'E213' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fenc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fencs',
     defaults = 'ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
       an existing file.  When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
       mentioned character encoding.  If an error is detected, the next one
       in the list is tried.  When an encoding is found that works,
       'fileencoding' is set to it.  If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
       an empty string, which means that UTF-8 is used.
       	WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! You can use
       	the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters
       	that can't be converted.
       For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
       will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
       "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present).  If you prefer
       another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
       preferred encoding is to be used.  Example: >vim
       	au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
       		\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
       <	This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
       non-blank characters.
       When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is
       not used.
       Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value
       of 'fileencoding' is used instead.  You can set it with: >vim
       	setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2
       <	This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than
       an empty file.
       The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
       (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file.  It must not be preceded
       by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
       An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
       because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
       accepted.
       The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
       environment.  It is useful when your environment uses a non-latin1
       encoding, such as Russian.
       When a file contains an illegal UTF-8 byte sequence it won't be
       recognized as "utf-8".  You can use the |8g8| command to find the
       illegal byte sequence.
       WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
       	latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
       	utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in a utf-8
       				file
       	cp1250,latin1		"cp1250" will always be used
       If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
       See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
       Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
       is read.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
     full_name = 'fileencodings',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('automatically detected character encodings'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fencs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ff',
     cb = 'did_set_fileformat',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'USE_CRNL',
       if_true = 'dos',
       if_false = 'unix',
       doc = 'Windows: "dos", Unix: "unix"',
     },
     values = { 'unix', 'dos', 'mac' },
     desc = [=[
       This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
       reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
           dos	    <CR><NL>
           unix    <NL>
           mac	    <CR>
       When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
       See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
       For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
       When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
       works like it was set to "unix".
       This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
       'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
       When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
       option is set, because the file would be different when written.
       This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'fileformat',
     no_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'curswant', 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('file format used for file I/O'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ff',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ffs',
     cb = 'did_set_str_generic',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'USE_CRNL',
       if_true = 'dos,unix',
       if_false = 'unix,dos',
       doc = 'Windows: "dos,unix", Unix: "unix,dos"',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
       starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
       buffer:
       - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
         always.  It is not set automatically.
       - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
         is opened.  'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer.  The
         'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
         buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
       - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
         <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file.  When starting to
         edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
         1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
            'fileformat' is set to "dos".
         2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix",
            'fileformat' is set to "unix".  Note that when a <NL> is found
            without a preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
         3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and
            if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
            This means that "mac" is only chosen when:
             "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and
             "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.
            Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before
            the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in
            the first few lines, "mac" is used.
         4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
            'fileformats' is used.
         When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
         this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
         file only, the option is not changed.
       When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.

       When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used.  You
       can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc.

       For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
       are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
       done:
       - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection.  Dos
         format will be used.
       - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
         is done.  This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
         <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
         used.
       Also see |file-formats|.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_str_generic',
     full_name = 'fileformats',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("automatically detected values for 'fileformat'"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ffs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fic',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME',
       if_false = false,
       if_true = true,
       doc = [[on for systems where case in file
  names is normally ignored]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       When set, case is ignored when using file and directory names.

       This option is on by default on systems where the filesystem is
       traditionally case-insensitive (for example MS-Windows and macOS).
       However, Vim cannot determine at runtime whether a particular
       filesystem is case-sensitive or case-insensitive.

       See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'fileignorecase',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('ignore case when using file names'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_fic',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ft',
     cb = 'did_set_filetype_or_syntax',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
       All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
       executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
       name.
       Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
       This option is normally set when the file type is detected.  To enable
       this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
       Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
       for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
       Example, for in an IDL file: >c
       	/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
       <	|FileType| |filetypes|
       When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
       names, it should therefore not be used for a filetype.  Example: >c
       	/* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */
       <	This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.
       This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files.  More than
       one dot may appear.
       This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
       'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
       Only alphanumeric characters, '-' and '_' can be used (and a '.' is
       allowed as delimiter when combining different filetypes).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'filetype',
     noglob = true,
     normal_fname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('type of file, used for autocommands'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ft',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fcs',
     cb = 'did_set_chars_option',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Characters to fill the statuslines, vertical separators, special
       lines in the window and truncated text in the |ins-completion-menu|.
       It is a comma-separated list of items.  Each item has a name, a colon
       and the value of that item: |E1511|

         item		default		Used for ~
         stl		' '		statusline of the current window
         stlnc		' '		statusline of the non-current windows
         wbr		' '		window bar
         horiz		'─' or '-'	horizontal separators |:split|
         horizup	'┴' or '-'	upwards facing horizontal separator
         horizdown	'┬' or '-'	downwards facing horizontal separator
         vert		'│' or '|'	vertical separators |:vsplit|
         vertleft	'┤' or '|'	left facing vertical separator
         vertright	'├' or '|'	right facing vertical separator
         verthoriz	'┼' or '+'	overlapping vertical and horizontal
       				separator
         fold		'·' or '-'	filling 'foldtext'
         foldopen	'-'		mark the beginning of a fold
         foldclose	'+'		show a closed fold
         foldsep	'│' or '|'	open fold middle marker
         foldinner	none		character to show instead of the
       				numeric foldlevel when it would be
       				repeated in a narrow 'foldcolumn'
         diff		'-'		deleted lines of the 'diff' option
         msgsep	' '		message separator 'display'
         eob		'~'		empty lines at the end of a buffer
         lastline	'@'		'display' contains lastline/truncate
         trunc		'>'		truncated text in the
       				|ins-completion-menu|.
         truncrl	'<'		same as "trunc" in 'rightleft' mode

       Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default.

       Note that "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown", "vertleft", "vertright" and
       "verthoriz" are only used when 'laststatus' is 3, since only vertical
       window separators are used otherwise.

       If 'ambiwidth' is "double" then "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown",
       "vert", "vertleft", "vertright", "verthoriz", "foldsep" and "fold"
       default to single-byte alternatives.

       Example: >vim
           set fillchars=stl:\ ,stlnc:\ ,vert:│,fold:·,diff:-
       <
       All items support single-byte and multibyte characters.  But
       double-width characters are not supported. |E1512|

       The highlighting used for these items:
         item		highlight group ~
         stl		StatusLine		|hl-StatusLine|
         stlnc		StatusLineNC		|hl-StatusLineNC|
         wbr		WinBar			|hl-WinBar| or |hl-WinBarNC|
         horiz		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         horizup	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         horizdown	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         vert		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         vertleft	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         vertright	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         verthoriz	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
         fold		Folded			|hl-Folded|
         foldopen	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
         foldclose	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
         foldsep	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
         diff		DiffDelete		|hl-DiffDelete|
         msgsep	MsgSeparator		|hl-MsgSeparator|
         eob		EndOfBuffer		|hl-EndOfBuffer|
         lastline	NonText			|hl-NonText|
         trunc		one of the many Popup menu highlighting groups like
       		|hl-PmenuSel|
         truncrl	same as "trunc"
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_chars_option',
     full_name = 'fillchars',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('characters to use for displaying special items'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fcs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ffu',
     cb = 'did_set_findfunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Function that is called to obtain the filename(s) for the |:find|
       command.  When this option is empty, the internal |file-searching|
       mechanism is used.

       The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
       See |option-value-function| for more information.

       The function is called with two arguments.  The first argument is a
       |String| and is the |:find| command argument.  The second argument is
       a |Boolean| and is set to |v:true| when the function is called to get
       a List of command-line completion matches for the |:find| command.
       The function should return a List of strings.

       The function is called only once per |:find| command invocation.
       The function can process all the directories specified in 'path'.

       If a match is found, the function should return a |List| containing
       one or more file names.  If a match is not found, the function
       should return an empty List.

       If any errors are encountered during the function invocation, an
       empty List is used as the return value.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       executing the 'findfunc' |textlock|.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.

       Examples:
       >vim
           " Use glob()
           func FindFuncGlob(cmdarg, cmdcomplete)
       	let pat = a:cmdcomplete ? $'{a:cmdarg}*' : a:cmdarg
       	return glob(pat, v:false, v:true)
           endfunc
           set findfunc=FindFuncGlob

           " Use the 'git ls-files' output
           func FindGitFiles(cmdarg, cmdcomplete)
       	let fnames = systemlist('git ls-files')
       	return fnames->filter('v:val =~? a:cmdarg')
           endfunc
           set findfunc=FindGitFiles
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'findfunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('function called for :find'),
     tags = { 'E1514' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ffu',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fixeol',
     cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file
       will be restored if missing.  Turn this option off if you want to
       preserve the situation from the original file.
       When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't
       matter.
       See the 'endofline' option.
       See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'fixendofline',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('make sure last line in file has <EOL>'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_fixeol',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fcl',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'all' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
       its level is higher than 'foldlevel'.  Useful if you want folds to
       automatically close when moving out of them.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldclose',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('close a fold when the cursor leaves it'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fcl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdc',
     defaults = '0',
     values = {
       'auto',
       'auto:1',
       'auto:2',
       'auto:3',
       'auto:4',
       'auto:5',
       'auto:6',
       'auto:7',
       'auto:8',
       'auto:9',
       '0',
       '1',
       '2',
       '3',
       '4',
       '5',
       '6',
       '7',
       '8',
       '9',
     },
     desc = [=[
       When and how to draw the foldcolumn. Valid values are:
           "auto":       resize to the minimum amount of folds to display.
           "auto:[1-9]": resize to accommodate multiple folds up to the
       		  selected level
           "0":          to disable foldcolumn
           "[1-9]":      to display a fixed number of columns
       See |folding|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldcolumn',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('width of the column used to indicate folds'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fen',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When off, all folds are open.  This option can be used to quickly
       switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
       folds (including manually opened or closed folds).  It can be toggled
       with the |zi| command.  The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
       'foldenable' is off.
       This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
       See |folding|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldenable',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('set to display all folds open'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fde',
     cb = 'did_set_foldexpr',
     defaults = '0',
     desc = [=[
       The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
       for each line to obtain its fold level.  The context is set to the
       script where 'foldexpr' was set, script-local items can be accessed.
       See |fold-expr| for the usage.

       The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
       modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
       This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
       on or the 'modelineexpr' option is off.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldexpr',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('expression used when \'foldmethod\' is "expr"'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdi',
     cb = 'did_set_foldignore',
     defaults = '#',
     desc = [=[
       Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent".  Lines starting with
       characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
       lines.  White space is skipped before checking for this character.
       The default "#" works well for C programs.  See |fold-indent|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldignore',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('ignore lines when \'foldmethod\' is "indent"'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdl',
     cb = 'did_set_foldlevel',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
       Setting this option to zero will close all folds.  Higher numbers will
       close fewer folds.
       This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
       See |fold-foldlevel|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldlevel',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('close folds with a level higher than this'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdls',
     defaults = -1,
     desc = [=[
       Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
       Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
       some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
       This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
       overrules this option.  Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
       ignores this option and closes all folds.
       It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
       overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
       When the value is negative, it is not used.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldlevelstart',
     redraw = { 'curswant' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("'foldlevel' when starting to edit a file"),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_fdls',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fmr',
     cb = 'did_set_foldmarker',
     defaults = '{{{,}}}',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker".  There
       must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker.  The
       marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
       See |fold-marker|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldmarker',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('markers used when \'foldmethod\' is "marker"'),
     tags = { 'E536' },
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdm',
     cb = 'did_set_foldmethod',
     defaults = 'manual',
     values = { 'manual', 'expr', 'marker', 'indent', 'syntax', 'diff' },
     desc = [=[
       The kind of folding used for the current window.  Possible values:
       |fold-manual|	manual	    Folds are created manually.
       |fold-indent|	indent	    Lines with equal indent form a fold.
       |fold-expr|	expr	    'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
       |fold-marker|	marker	    Markers are used to specify folds.
       |fold-syntax|	syntax	    Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
       |fold-diff|	diff	    Fold text that is not changed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldmethod',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('folding type'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fml',
     cb = 'did_set_foldminlines',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed
       closed.  Also for manually closed folds.  With the default value of
       one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines.
       Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line.
       Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed.  After using
       "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
       than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldminlines',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for a fold to be closed'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdn',
     cb = 'did_set_foldnestmax',
     defaults = 20,
     desc = [=[
       Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
       methods.  This avoids that too many folds will be created.  Using more
       than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldnestmax',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum fold depth'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdo',
     defaults = 'block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,search,tag,undo',
     values = {
       'all',
       'block',
       'hor',
       'mark',
       'percent',
       'quickfix',
       'search',
       'tag',
       'insert',
       'undo',
       'jump',
     },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
       command moves the cursor into a closed fold.  It is a comma-separated
       list of items.
       NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.
       Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
       (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself)

       	item		commands ~
       	all		any
       	block		(, {, [[, [{, etc.
       	hor		horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
       	insert		any command in Insert mode
       	jump		far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
       	mark		jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
       	percent		"%"
       	quickfix	":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
       	search		search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
       			(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
       			Also for |[s| and |]s|.
       	tag		jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
       	undo		undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
       When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
       this option is not used.  This means the operator will include the
       whole closed fold.
       Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
       very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
       In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
       when text is inserted.
       To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
       set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldopen',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'curswant' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('for which commands a fold will be opened'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fdo',
     flags_varname = 'fdo_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fdt',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = 'foldtext()',
     desc = [=[
       An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
       fold.  The context is set to the script where 'foldexpr' was set,
       script-local items can be accessed.  See |fold-foldtext| for the
       usage.

       The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
       modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.

       When set to an empty string, foldtext is disabled, and the line
       is displayed normally with highlighting and no line wrapping.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'foldtext',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('expression used to display for a closed fold'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fex',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
       operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
       option is empty 'formatprg' is used.

       The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
       The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
       The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
       	      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
       	      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
       	      it yet!

       Example: >vim
       	set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
       <	This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
       autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|

       The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
       faster, see |expr-option-function|.

       The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
       text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
       when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
       same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
       return "i" or "R" in this situation.

       When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
       the internal format mechanism.

       If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
       the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
       	set formatexpr=s:MyFormatExpr()
       	set formatexpr=<SID>SomeFormatExpr()
       <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
       where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

       The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
       modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
       since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'formatexpr',
     modelineexpr = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('expression used with "gq" command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fex',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'flp',
     defaults = '^\\s*\\d\\+[\\]:.)}\\t ]\\s*',
     desc = [=[
       A pattern that is used to recognize a list header.  This is used for
       the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
       The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
       the line below it.  You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
       while still checking more characters.  There must be a character
       following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
       like there is no match.
       The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
       character and white space.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'formatlistpat',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('pattern used to recognize a list header'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_flp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fo',
     cb = 'did_set_formatoptions',
     defaults = macros('DFLT_FO_VIM', 'string'),
     desc = [=[
       This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
       formatting is to be done.
       See |fo-table| for possible values and |gq| for how to format text.
       Commas can be inserted for readability.
       To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
       "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_formatoptions',
     full_name = 'formatoptions',
     list = 'flags',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('how automatic formatting is to be done'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fo',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fp',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
       selected with the |gq| operator.  The program must take the input on
       stdin and produce the output on stdout.  The Unix program "fmt" is
       such a program.
       If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead.
       Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal
       format function will be used |C-indenting|.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
       about including spaces and backslashes.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'formatprg',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('name of external program used with "gq" command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_fp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'fs',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on, the OS function fsync() will be called after saving a file
       (|:write|, |writefile()|, …), |swap-file|, |undo-persistence| and |shada-file|.
       This flushes the file to disk, ensuring that it is safely written.
       Slow on some systems: writing buffers, quitting Nvim, and other
       operations may sometimes take a few seconds.

       Files are ALWAYS flushed ('fsync' is ignored) when:
       - |CursorHold| event is triggered
       - |:preserve| is called
       - system signals low battery life
       - Nvim exits abnormally

       This is a |global-local| option, so it can be set per buffer, for
       example when writing to a slow filesystem.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'fsync',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('whether to invoke fsync() after file write'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_fs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gd',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'gdefault',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_gd',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gfm',
     defaults = macros('DFLT_GREPFORMAT', 'string'),
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
       This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
       'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.

       If ripgrep ('grepprg') is available, this option defaults to `%f:%l:%c:%m`.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'grepformat',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("format of 'grepprg' output"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_gefm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gp',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = 'grep -HIn $* /dev/null',
       if_true = 'findstr /n $* nul',
       doc = [[see below]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       Program to use for the |:grep| command.  This option may contain '%'
       and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
       line.  The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
       will be included.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See
       |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
       Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
       works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like
       |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|.
       See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
       apply equally to 'grepprg'.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
       This option defaults to:
       - `rg --vimgrep -uu ` if ripgrep is available (|:checkhealth|),
       - `grep -HIn $* /dev/null` on Unix,
       - `findstr /n $* nul` on Windows.
       Ripgrep can perform additional filtering such as using .gitignore rules
       and skipping hidden files. This is disabled by default (see the -u option)
       to more closely match the behaviour of standard grep.
       You can make ripgrep match Vim's case handling using the
       -i/--ignore-case and -S/--smart-case options.
       An |OptionSet| autocmd can be used to set it up to match automatically.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'grepprg',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('program to use for ":grep"'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_gp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gcr',
     cb = 'did_set_guicursor',
     defaults = 'n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr-o:hor20,t:block-blinkon500-blinkoff500-TermCursor',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Configures the cursor style for each mode. Works in the GUI and many
       terminals.  See |tui-cursor-shape|.

       To disable cursor-styling, reset the option: >vim
       	set guicursor=

       <	To enable mode shapes, "Cursor" highlight, and blinking: >vim
       	set guicursor=n-v-c:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr:hor20,o:hor50
       	  \,a:blinkwait700-blinkoff400-blinkon250-Cursor/lCursor
       	  \,sm:block-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175

       <	The option is a comma-separated list of parts.  Each part consists of a
       mode-list and an argument-list:
       	mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
       The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
       	n	Normal mode
       	v	Visual mode
       	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
       		if not specified)
       	o	Operator-pending mode
       	i	Insert mode
       	r	Replace mode
       	c	Command-line Normal (append) mode
       	ci	Command-line Insert mode
       	cr	Command-line Replace mode
       	sm	showmatch in Insert mode
       	t	Terminal mode
       	a	all modes
       The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
       	hor{N}	horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
       	ver{N}	vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
       	block	block cursor, fills the whole character
       		- Only one of the above three should be present.
       		- Default is "block" for each mode.
       	blinkwait{N}				*cursor-blinking*
       	blinkon{N}
       	blinkoff{N}
       		blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
       		the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
       		the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
       		cursor is not shown.  Times are in msec.  When one of
       		the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. E.g.: >vim
       			set guicursor=n:blinkon0
       <
       		Default is "blinkon0" for each mode.
       	{group-name}
       		Highlight group that decides the color and font of the
       		cursor.
       		In the |TUI|:
       		- |inverse|/reverse and no group-name are interpreted
       		  as "host-terminal default cursor colors" which
       		  typically means "inverted bg and fg colors".
       		- |ctermfg| and |guifg| are ignored.
       	{group-name}/{group-name}
       		Two highlight group names, the first is used when
       		no language mappings are used, the other when they
       		are. |language-mapping|

       Examples of parts:
          n-c-v:block-nCursor	In Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
       			block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
       			highlight group
          n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25-Cursor,r-cr-o:hor20
       			In Normal et al. modes, use a block cursor
       			with the default colors defined by the host
       			terminal.  In Insert-like modes, use
       			a vertical bar cursor with colors from
       			"Cursor" highlight group.  In Replace-like
       			modes, use an underline cursor with
       			default colors.
          i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
       			In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
       			30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
       			"iCursor" highlight group.  Blink a bit
       			faster.

       The 'a' mode is different.  It will set the given argument-list for
       all modes.  It does not reset anything to defaults.  This can be used
       to do a common setting for all modes.  For example, to switch off
       blinking: "a:blinkon0"

       Examples of cursor highlighting: >vim
           highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
           highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'guicursor',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('GUI: settings for cursor shape and blinking'),
     tags = { 'E545', 'E546', 'E548', 'E549' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_guicursor',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gfn',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('DFLT_GFN', 'string'),
       doc = [[(MS-Windows) "Cascadia Code,Cascadia Mono,Consolas,Courier New,monospace"
                    (Mac) "SF Mono,Menlo,Monaco,Courier New,monospace"
                  (Linux) "Source Code Pro,DejaVu Sans Mono,Courier New,monospace"
                 (others) "DejaVu Sans Mono,Courier New,monospace"]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
       In its simplest form the value is just one font name.  When
       the font cannot be found you will get an error message.  To try other
       font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
       The first valid font is used.

       Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name
       precede it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra
       backslash before a space and a backslash.  See also
       |option-backslash|.  For example: >vim
           set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
       <	will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
       will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.

       If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
       If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
       settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
       will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
       the case of X).  The font names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim
       will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.

       For Win32 and Mac OS: >vim
           set guifont=*
       <	will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.

       The font name depends on the GUI used.

       For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >vim
           set guifont=Monaco:h10
       <								*E236*
       Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
       width).

       To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
       program.  The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.

       For the Win32 GUI					*E244* *E245*
       - takes these options in the font name:
       	hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
       	wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
       	b   - bold
       	i   - italic
       	u   - underline
       	s   - strikeout
       	cXX - character set XX.  Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
       	      BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
       	      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
       	      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
       	      Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".

         Use a ':' to separate the options.
       - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
         backslashes to escape the spaces.
       - Examples: >vim
           set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
           set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
       <
     ]=],
     deny_duplicates = true,
     full_name = 'guifont',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('GUI: Name(s) of font(s) to be used'),
     tags = { 'E235', 'E596' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_guifont',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gfw',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Comma-separated list of fonts to be used for double-width characters.
       The first font that can be loaded is used.
       Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
       specified with 'guifont' and the same height.

       When 'guifont' has a valid font and 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will
       attempt to set 'guifontwide' to a matching double-width font.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'guifontwide',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('list of font names for double-wide characters'),
     tags = { 'E231', 'E533', 'E534' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_guifontwide',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'go',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = '"egmrLT"   (MS-Windows)',
     },
     desc = [=[
       This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim.  It is a
       sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
       GUI should be used.
       To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
       "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

       Valid letters are as follows:
       						*guioptions_a* *'go-a'*
         'a'	Autoselect:  If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
       	or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
       	the windowing system's global selection.  This means that the
       	Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
       	applications as well as into Vim itself.  When the Visual mode
       	ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
       	application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
       	is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
       	Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
       	applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
       	    If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
       	windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
       	by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
       	The same applies to the modeless selection.
       							*'go-P'*
         'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
       	register.
       							*'go-A'*
         'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
       	applies to the modeless selection.

       	    'guioptions'   autoselect Visual  autoselect modeless ~
       		 ""		 -			 -
       		 "a"		yes			yes
       		 "A"		 -			yes
       		 "aA"		yes			yes

       							*'go-c'*
         'c'	Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
       	choices.
       							*'go-d'*
         'd'	Use dark theme variant if available.
       							*'go-e'*
         'e'	Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'.
       	'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels.
       	When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used.
       	The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently
       	Mac OS/X and MS-Windows.
       							*'go-i'*
         'i'	Use a Vim icon.
       							*'go-m'*
         'm'	Menu bar is present.
       							*'go-M'*
         'M'	The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.  Note
       	that this flag must be added in the vimrc file, before
       	switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
       	file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
       	`:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too).
       							*'go-g'*
         'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
       	'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
       							*'go-T'*
         'T'	Include Toolbar.  Currently only in Win32 GUI.
       							*'go-r'*
         'r'	Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
       							*'go-R'*
         'R'	Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
       	split window.
       							*'go-l'*
         'l'	Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
       							*'go-L'*
         'L'	Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
       	split window.
       							*'go-b'*
         'b'	Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.  Its size depends on
       	the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
       	flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
       							*'go-h'*
         'h'	Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
       	line.  Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|

       And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
       you really want to :-).  See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.

       							*'go-v'*
         'v'	Use a vertical button layout for dialogs.  When not included,
       	a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
       	vertical layout is used anyway.  Not supported in GTK 3.
       							*'go-p'*
         'p'	Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
       	window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
       	the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
       	before starting the GUI.  Set it in your |gvimrc|.  Adding or
       	removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
       							*'go-k'*
         'k'	Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or
       	toolbar, tabline, etc.  Instead, the behavior is similar to
       	when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and
       	'columns' to fit to the window.  Without the 'k' flag Vim will
       	try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and
       	removing GUI components.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'guioptions',
     list = 'flags',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('GUI: Which components and options are used'),
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gtl',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab
       pages line.  When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a
       default label.  See |setting-guitablabel| for more info.

       The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
       'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below.
       The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
       modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed.  'e' must be
       present in 'guioptions'.  For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is
       used.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'guitablabel',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('GUI: custom label for a tab page'),
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'gtt',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab
       pages line.  When empty Vim will use a default tooltip.
       This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above.
       You can include a line break.  Simplest method is to use |:let|: >vim
       	let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two"
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'guitabtooltip',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('GUI: custom tooltip for a tab page'),
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hf',
     cb = 'did_set_helpfile',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('DFLT_HELPFILE', 'string'),
       doc = [[(MS-Windows) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
                 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt"]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       Name of the main help file.  All distributed help files should be
       placed together in one directory.  Additionally, all "doc" directories
       in 'runtimepath' will be used.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  For example:
       "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt".  If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
       tried.  Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
       spaces and backslashes.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'helpfile',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('full path name of the main help file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_hf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hh',
     cb = 'did_set_helpheight',
     defaults = 20,
     desc = [=[
       Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
       ":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
       current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
       windows.  When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
       set to 'helpheight'.  Set to zero to disable.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'helpheight',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum height of a new help window'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_hh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hlg',
     cb = 'did_set_helplang',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = 'messages language or empty',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Comma-separated list of languages.  Vim will use the first language
       for which the desired help can be found.  The English help will always
       be used as a last resort.  You can add "en" to prefer English over
       another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
       language and not in the English help.
       Example: >vim
       	set helplang=de,it
       <	This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
       files.
       When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
       try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
       See |help-translated|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'helplang',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('preferred help languages'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_hlg',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hid',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When off a buffer is unloaded (including loss of undo information)
       when it is |abandon|ed.  When on a buffer becomes hidden when it is
       |abandon|ed.  A buffer displayed in another window does not become
       hidden, of course.

       Commands that move through the buffer list sometimes hide a buffer
       although the 'hidden' option is off when these three are true:
       - the buffer is modified
       - 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible
       - the '!' flag was used
       Also see |windows|.

       To hide a specific buffer use the 'bufhidden' option.
       'hidden' is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'hidden',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("don't unload buffer when it is |abandon|ed"),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_hid',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hl',
     cb = 'did_set_highlight',
     defaults = macros('HIGHLIGHT_INIT', 'string'),
     deny_duplicates = true,
     full_name = 'highlight',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('sets highlighting mode for various occasions'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_hl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hi',
     defaults = 10000,
     desc = [=[
       A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
       is remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
       each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing| and 'messagesopt' for
       the number of messages to remember).
       The maximum value is 10000.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'history',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of command-lines that are remembered'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_hi',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hk',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'hkmap',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hkp',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'hkmapp',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'hls',
     cb = 'did_set_hlsearch',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
       The |hl-Search| highlight group determines the highlighting for all
       matches not under the cursor while the |hl-CurSearch| highlight group
       (if defined) determines the highlighting for the match under the
       cursor. If |hl-CurSearch| is not defined, then |hl-Search| is used for
       both. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
       are not applied.
       See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
       When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
       off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
       soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
       'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
       When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
       highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
       search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
       line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
       drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
       You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
       with the 'h' flag in 'shada' |shada-h|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'hlsearch',
     redraw = { 'all_windows', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('highlight matches with last search pattern'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_hls',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_title_icon',
     defaults = {
       if_true = false,
       doc = 'off, on when title can be restored',
     },
     desc = [=[
       When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
       'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
       currently being edited.  Only the last part of the name is used.
       Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
       Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'icon',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Vim set the text of the window icon'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_icon',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_iconstring',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
       the window.  This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
       Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
       When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
       expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  See
       'titlestring' for example settings.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'iconstring',
     modelineexpr = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('to use for the Vim icon text'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_iconstring',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ic',
     cb = 'did_set_ignorecase',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Ignore case in search patterns, |cmdline-completion|, when
       searching in the tags file, |expr-==| and for Insert-mode completion
       |ins-completion|.
       Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'.
       Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
       |/ignorecase|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'ignorecase',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('ignore case in search patterns'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ic',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'imc',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
       line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
       Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
       English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
       characters with dead keys.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'imcmdline',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('use IM when starting to edit a command line'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'imd',
     defaults = {
       if_true = false,
       doc = 'off, on for some systems (SGI)',
     },
     desc = [=[
       When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
       the IM when it doesn't work properly.
       Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
       may change in later releases.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'imdisable',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('do not use the IM in any mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'imi',
     cb = 'did_set_iminsert',
     defaults = macros('B_IMODE_NONE', 'number'),
     desc = [=[
       Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
       Insert mode.  Valid values:
       	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
       	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
       	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
       To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
       this can be used: >vim
       	inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
       <	This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
       mode.
       Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
       |i_CTRL-^|.
       The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
       It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'iminsert',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('use :lmap or IM in Insert mode'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_iminsert',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ims',
     defaults = macros('B_IMODE_USE_INSERT', 'number'),
     desc = [=[
       Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
       entering a search pattern.  Valid values:
       	-1	the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
       		'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
       	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
       	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
       	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
       Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
       |c_CTRL-^|.
       The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
       option to a valid keymap name.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'imsearch',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_imsearch',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'icm',
     cb = 'did_set_inccommand',
     defaults = 'nosplit',
     values = { 'nosplit', 'split', '' },
     desc = [=[
       When nonempty, shows the effects of |:substitute|, |:smagic|,
       |:snomagic| and user commands with the |:command-preview| flag as you
       type.

       Possible values:
       	nosplit	Shows the effects of a command incrementally in the
       		buffer.
       	split	Like "nosplit", but also shows partial off-screen
       		results in a preview window.

       If the preview for built-in commands is too slow (exceeds
       'redrawtime') then 'inccommand' is automatically disabled until
       |Command-line-mode| is done.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'inccommand',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Live preview of substitution'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_icm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'inc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Pattern to be used to find an include command.  It is a search
       pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|).  This option
       is used for the commands "[i", "]I", "[d", etc.
       Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that
       comes after the matched pattern.  But if "\zs" appears in the pattern
       then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it
       appears, is used as the file name.  Use this to include characters
       that are not in 'isfname', such as a space.  You can then use
       'includeexpr' to process the matched text.
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'include',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('pattern to be used to find an include file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_inc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'inex',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
       option to a file name.  Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >vim
       	setlocal includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
       <	The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
       Note the double backslash: the `:set` command first halves them, then
       one remains in the value, where "\." matches a dot literally.  For
       simple character replacements `tr()` avoids the need for escaping: >vim
       	setlocal includeexpr=tr(v:fname,'.','/')
       <
       Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
       found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
       Note: Not used for |<cfile>|.

       If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
       the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
       	setlocal includeexpr=s:MyIncludeExpr()
       	setlocal includeexpr=<SID>SomeIncludeExpr()
       <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
       where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

       It is more efficient if the value is just a function call without
       arguments, see |expr-option-function|.

       The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
       modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'includeexpr',
     modelineexpr = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('expression used to process an include line'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_inex',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'is',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
       so far, matches.  The matched string is highlighted.  If the pattern
       is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will be updated
       often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
       Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
       original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>.  You
       still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
       cursor to the match.
       You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and
       previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T|
       Vim only searches for about half a second.  With a complicated
       pattern and/or a lot of text the match may not be found.  This is to
       avoid that Vim hangs while you are typing the pattern.
       The |hl-IncSearch| highlight group determines the highlighting.
       When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while
       typing a search command.  See also: 'hlsearch'.
       If you don't want to turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all
       matches while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with
       autocmd.  Example: >vim
       	augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight
       	  autocmd!
       	  autocmd CmdlineEnter [\/\?] :set hlsearch
       	  autocmd CmdlineLeave [\/\?] :set nohlsearch
       	augroup END
       <
       CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
       to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
       command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
       converted to lowercase.
       CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
       match, excluding the characters that were already typed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'incsearch',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('highlight match while typing search pattern'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_is',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'inde',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
       It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
       in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
       When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
       'smartindent' indenting.  When 'lisp' is set, this option is
       only used when 'lispoptions' contains "expr:1".
       The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
       which the indent is to be computed.  The cursor is also in this line
       when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).

       If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
       the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
       	set indentexpr=s:MyIndentExpr()
       	set indentexpr=<SID>SomeIndentExpr()
       <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
       where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

       The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
       faster, see |expr-option-function|.

       The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent.  It
       can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
       used for the indent).
       Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
       and |lispindent()|.
       The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!  It must
       not change the text, jump to another window, etc.  Afterwards the
       cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
       Normally this option would be set to call a function: >vim
       	set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
       <	Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
       "msg".
       See |indent-expression|.

       The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
       modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'indentexpr',
     modelineexpr = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('expression used to obtain the indent of a line'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_inde',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'indk',
     defaults = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
       the current line.  Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
       The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
       See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'indentkeys',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_("keys that trigger indenting with 'indentexpr'"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_indk',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'inf',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
       'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending
       on the typed text.  If the typed text contains a lowercase letter
       where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made
       lowercase.  If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match
       has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter,
       and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase.
       With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'infercase',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('adjust case of match for keyword completion'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_inf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'im',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'insertmode',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'isf',
     cb = 'did_set_isopt',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
       if_false = '@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=',
       if_true = '@,48-57,/,\\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,=',
       doc = [[for Windows:
     "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,="
    otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="]],
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
       path names.  Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
       the tags file.  It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
       Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
       characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
       For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
       Think twice before adding white space to this option.  Although a
       space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim
       doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion.
       It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'.

       Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
       do its best to make it work as you would expect.  That is a bit
       tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
       characters.  Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
       name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes.  The
       '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
       cmd.exe.

       The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
       Each part can be a single character number or a range.  A range is two
       character numbers with '-' in between.  A character number can be a
       decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
       not work for digits).  Example:
       	"_,-,128-140,#-43"	(include '_' and '-' and the range
       				128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
       If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
       will be excluded from the option.  The option is interpreted from left
       to right.  Put the excluded character after the range where it is
       included.  To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
       option or the end of a range.  Example:
       	"^a-z,#,^"	(exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
       If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
       are included.  Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
       plus accented characters.  To include '@' itself use "@-@".  Examples:
       	"@,^a-z"	All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
       			case ASCII letters.
       	"a-z,A-Z,@-@"	All letters plus the '@' character.
       A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
       expected.  Example:
       	"48-57,,,_"	Digits, comma and underscore.
       A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'.  Example:
       	" -~,^,,9"	All characters from space to '~', excluding
       			comma, plus <Tab>.
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'isfname',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('characters included in file names and pathnames'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_isf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'isi',
     cb = 'did_set_isopt',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = '@,48-57,_,192-255',
       if_true = '@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235',
       doc = [[for Windows:
                   "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
        otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"]],
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
       Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
       match of the 'define' option.  It is also used for "\i" in a
       |pattern|.  See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
       option.  For '@' only characters up to 255 are used.
       Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
       environment variables.  E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
       expand "$HOME/.local/state/nvim/shada/main.shada".  Maybe you should
       change 'iskeyword' instead.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'isident',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('characters included in identifiers'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_isi',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'isk',
     cb = 'did_set_iskeyword',
     defaults = '@,48-57,_,192-255',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
       "w", "*", "[i", etc.  It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|.  See
       'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.  For '@'
       characters above 255 check the "word" character class (any character
       that is categorized as a letter, number or emoji according to the
       Unicode general category).

       Note that there is a difference between the "\k" character class and
       the |word| motion.  The former matches any word character, while the
       latter stops at a change of the character class.

       For C programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
       For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
       "*", '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
       command).
       When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
       This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax
       uses |:syn-iskeyword|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'iskeyword',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('characters included in keywords'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_isk',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'isp',
     cb = 'did_set_isopt',
     defaults = '@,161-255',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
       screen.  It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|.  The characters from
       space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
       even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded.  See
       'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.

       Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
       	  0 -  31	"^@" - "^_"
       	 32 - 126	always single characters
       	   127		"^?"
       	128 - 159	"~@" - "~_"
       	160 - 254	"| " - "|~"
       	   255		"~?"
       Illegal bytes from 128 to 255 (invalid UTF-8) are
       displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
       When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
       displayed as <xx>.
       The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
       |hl-SpecialKey|

       Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
       characters up to 255 are specified with this option.  When a character
       is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
       replacement character will be shown.
       Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
       There is no option to specify these characters.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'isprint',
     list = 'comma',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('printable characters'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_isp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'js',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
       Otherwise only one space is inserted.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'joinspaces',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('two spaces after a period with a join command'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_js',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'jop',
     defaults = 'clean',
     values = { 'stack', 'view', 'clean' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of words that change the behavior of the |jumplist|.
         stack         Make the jumplist behave like the tagstack.
       		Relative location of entries in the jumplist is
       		preserved at the cost of discarding subsequent entries
       		when navigating backwards in the jumplist and then
       		jumping to a location.  |jumplist-stack|

         view          When moving through the jumplist, |changelist|,
       		|alternate-file|, using |mark-motions| or when popping
       		the |tagstack| try to restore the |mark-view| in which
       		the action occurred.

         clean         Remove unloaded buffers from the jumplist.
       		EXPERIMENTAL: this flag may change in the future.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'jumpoptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Controls the behavior of the jumplist'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_jop',
     flags_varname = 'jop_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'kmp',
     cb = 'did_set_keymap',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Name of a keyboard mapping.  See |mbyte-keymap|.
       Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
       setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
       'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
       Only alphanumeric characters, '.', '-' and '_' can be used.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'keymap',
     normal_fname_chars = true,
     pri_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines', 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('name of a keyboard mapping'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_keymap',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'km',
     cb = 'did_set_keymodel',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'startsel', 'stopsel' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of comma-separated words, which enable special things that keys
       can do.  These values can be used:
          startsel	Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
       		Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
       		present in 'selectmode').
          stopsel	Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
       Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
       <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'keymodel',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('enable starting/stopping selection with keys'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_km',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'kp',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_true = ':help',
       if_false = ':Man',
       doc = '":Man", Windows: ":help"',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
       expanded |:set_env|.  ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
       help.  (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
       value did this, which is now deprecated.)
       When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim
       Ex command prefixed with [count].
       When "man" or "man -s" is used, Vim will automatically translate
       a [count] for the "K" command to a section number.
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
       Example: >vim
       	set keywordprg=man\ -s
       	set keywordprg=:Man
       <	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'keywordprg',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('program to use for the "K" command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_kp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lmap',
     cb = 'did_set_langmap',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
       mode.  When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
       inserted directly.  When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes
       care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
       of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
       be able to execute Normal mode commands.
       This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
       mapped in Insert mode.
       Also consider setting 'langremap' to off, to prevent 'langmap' from
       applying to characters resulting from a mapping.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.

       Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):				*greek*  >vim
           set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
       <	Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >vim
           set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
       <
       The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas.  Each
       part can be in one of two forms:
       1.  A list of pairs.  Each pair is a "from" character immediately
           followed by the "to" character.  Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
       2.  A list of "from" characters, a semicolon and a list of "to"
           characters.  Example: "abc;ABC"
       Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
       Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash.  These are
       ";", ',', '"', '|' and backslash itself.

       This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
       back and forth between the languages.  Your language characters will
       be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
       langmap mappings) in the following cases:
        o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
        o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
        o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
       Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
       this option.   Note that this option can be changed at any time
       allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
       Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
     ]=],
     full_name = 'langmap',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('alphabetic characters for other language mode'),
     tags = { 'E357', 'E358' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_langmap',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lm',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Language to use for menu translation.  Tells which file is loaded
       from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >vim
       	"lang/menu_" .. &langmenu .. ".vim"
       <	(without the spaces).  For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
       matter what $LANG is set to: >vim
       	set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
       <	When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
       Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
       If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
       the English menus: >vim
       	set langmenu=none
       <	This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
       detection or syntax highlighting.  Once the menus are defined setting
       this option has no effect.  But you could do this: >vim
       	source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
       	set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
       	source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
       <	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
     ]=],
     full_name = 'langmenu',
     normal_fname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('language to be used for the menus'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_lm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lnr',
     cb = 'did_set_langnoremap',
     defaults = true,
     full_name = 'langnoremap',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("do not apply 'langmap' to mapped characters"),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_lnr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lrm',
     cb = 'did_set_langremap',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting
       from a mapping.  If setting 'langmap' disables some of your mappings,
       make sure this option is off.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'langremap',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_lrm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ls',
     cb = 'did_set_laststatus',
     defaults = 2,
     desc = [=[
       The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
       status line:
       	0: never
       	1: only if there are at least two windows
       	2: always
       	3: always and ONLY the last window
       The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
       windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'laststatus',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('tells when last window has status lines'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ls',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lz',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
       executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
       typed.  Also, updating the window title is postponed.  To force an
       update use |:redraw|.
       This may occasionally cause display errors.  It is only meant to be
       set temporarily when performing an operation where redrawing may cause
       flickering or cause a slowdown.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'lazyredraw',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("don't redraw while executing macros"),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_lz',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lhi',
     cb = 'did_set_xhistory',
     defaults = 10,
     desc = [=[
       Like 'chistory', but for the location list stack associated with a
       window.  If the option is changed in either the location list window
       itself or the window that is associated with the location list stack,
       the new value will also be applied to the other one.  This means this
       value will always be the same for a given location list window and its
       corresponding window.  See |quickfix-stack| for additional info.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'lhistory',
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('number of location lists stored in history'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lbr',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
       than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
       'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
       it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.
       If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented.  Then, the value
       of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.  This option
       is not used when the 'wrap' option is off.
       Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
       with the right amount of white space.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'linebreak',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('wrap long lines at a blank'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_lines_or_columns',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('DFLT_ROWS', 'number'),
       doc = '24 or terminal height',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Number of lines of the Vim window.
       Normally you don't need to set this.  It is done automatically by the
       terminal initialization code.
       When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
       option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
       to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
       Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen.  You can
       use this command to get the tallest window possible: >vim
       	set lines=999
       <	Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'lines',
     no_mkrc = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('of lines in the display'),
     tags = { 'E593' },
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_lines',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lsp',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       		only in the GUI
       Number of pixel lines inserted between characters.  Useful if the font
       uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
       When non-zero there is room for underlining.
       With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
       space for ascents and descents).  Then it makes sense to set
       'linespace' to a negative value.  This may cause display problems
       though!
     ]=],
     full_name = 'linespace',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of pixel lines to use between characters'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_linespace',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_lisp',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
       the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of).  Also happens with
       "cc" or "S".  'autoindent' must also be on for this to work.
       Also see 'lispwords'.
       The '-' character is included in keyword characters.  Redefines the
       "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
       calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'lisp',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('indenting for Lisp'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_lisp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lop',
     cb = 'did_set_lispoptions',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'expr:0', 'expr:1' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Comma-separated list of items that influence the Lisp indenting when
       enabled with the 'lisp' option.  Currently only one item is supported:
       	expr:1	use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting when it is set
       	expr:0	do not use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting (default)
       Note that when using 'indentexpr' the `=` operator indents all the
       lines, otherwise the first line is not indented (Vi-compatible).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'lispoptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('options for lisp indenting'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_lop',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lw',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('LISPWORD_VALUE', 'string'),
       doc = 'is very long',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Comma-separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting when
       enabled with the 'lisp' option.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'lispwords',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('words that change how lisp indenting works'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_lispwords',
   },
   {
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       List mode: By default, show tabs as ">", trailing spaces as "-", and
       non-breakable space characters as "+". Useful to see the difference
       between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks. Further changed by
       the 'listchars' option.

       When 'listchars' does not contain "tab" field, tabs are shown as "^I"
       or "<09>", like how unprintable characters are displayed.

       The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character
       occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode.  To get this cursor
       position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: >vim
       	let &list = v:true | let &lcs = 'tab:  '
       <
       Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth'
       or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'.  See 'listchars' for
       changing the way tabs are displayed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'list',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('<Tab> and <EOL>'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lcs',
     cb = 'did_set_chars_option',
     defaults = 'tab:> ,trail:-,nbsp:+',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
       comma-separated list of string settings. *E1511*

       						*lcs-eol*
         eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
       		omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
       		line.
       						*lcs-tab*
         tab:xy[z]	Two or three characters to be used to show a tab.
       		The third character is optional.

         tab:xy	The 'x' is always used, then 'y' as many times as will
       		fit.  Thus "tab:>-" displays: >
       			>
       			>-
       			>--
       			etc.
       <
         tab:xyz	The 'z' is always used, then 'x' is prepended, and
       		then 'y' is used as many times as will fit.  Thus
       		"tab:<->" displays: >
       			>
       			<>
       			<->
       			<-->
       			etc.
       <
       		When "tab:" is omitted, a tab is shown as ^I.
       						*lcs-space*
         space:c	Character to show for a space.  When omitted, spaces
       		are left blank.
       						*lcs-multispace*
         multispace:c...
       		One or more characters to use cyclically to show for
       		multiple consecutive spaces.  Overrides the "space"
       		setting, except for single spaces.  When omitted, the
       		"space" setting is used.  For example,
       		`:set listchars=multispace:---+` shows ten consecutive
       		spaces as: >
       			---+---+--
       <
       						*lcs-lead*
         lead:c	Character to show for leading spaces.  When omitted,
       		leading spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
       		"multispace" settings for leading spaces.  You can
       		combine it with "tab:", for example: >vim
       			set listchars+=tab:>-,lead:.
       <
       						*lcs-leadmultispace*
         leadmultispace:c...
       		Like the |lcs-multispace| value, but for leading
       		spaces only.  Also overrides |lcs-lead| for leading
       		multiple spaces.
       		`:set listchars=leadmultispace:---+` shows ten
       		consecutive leading spaces as: >
       			---+---+--XXX
       <
       		Where "XXX" denotes the first non-blank characters in
       		the line.
       						*lcs-leadtab*
         leadtab:xy[z]
       		Like |lcs-tab|, but only for leading tabs.  When
       		omitted, the "tab" setting is used for leading tabs.
       		|lcs-tab| must also be set for this to work. *E1572*
       		You can combine it with "tab:", for example: >vim
       			let &listchars = 'tab:>-,leadtab:. '
       <			This shows leading tabs as periods(.) and other tabs
       		as ">--".
       						*lcs-trail*
         trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
       		trailing spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
       		"multispace" settings for trailing spaces.
       						*lcs-extends*
         extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
       		off and the line continues beyond the right of the
       		screen.
       						*lcs-precedes*
         precedes:c	Character to show in the first visible column of the
       		physical line, when there is text preceding the
       		character visible in the first column.
       						*lcs-conceal*
         conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
       		'conceallevel' is set to 1.  A space when omitted.
       						*lcs-nbsp*
         nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space character
       		(0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F).  Left blank when
       		omitted.

       The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
       be used.  All characters must be single width. *E1512*

       Each character can be specified as hex: >vim
       	set listchars=eol:\\x24
       	set listchars=eol:\\u21b5
       	set listchars=eol:\\U000021b5
       <	Note that a double backslash is used.  The number of hex characters
       must be exactly 2 for \\x, 4 for \\u and 8 for \\U.

       Examples: >vim
           set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
           set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
           set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
       <	|hl-NonText| highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
       "precedes". |hl-Whitespace| for "nbsp", "space", "tab", "multispace",
       "lead" and "trail".
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_chars_option',
     full_name = 'listchars',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('characters for displaying in list mode'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_lcs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'lpl',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
       This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
       of plugins.
       Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
       reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'loadplugins',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('load plugin scripts when starting up'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_lpl',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     full_name = 'magic',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_magic',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mef',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
       and the |:grep| command.
       When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
       When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
       unique.  This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
       existing file.
       NOT used for the ":cf" command.  See 'errorfile' for that.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'makeef',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('name of the errorfile for ":make"'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mef',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'menc',
     cb = 'did_set_encoding',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Encoding used for reading the output of external commands.  When
       empty, encoding is not converted.
       This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`,
       `:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`,
       and `:laddfile`.

       This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows.  If iconv is
       enabled, setting 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as
       setting to the system locale encoding.  Example: >vim
       	set makeencoding=char	" system locale is used
       <
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
     full_name = 'makeencoding',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('Converts the output of external commands'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_menc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mp',
     defaults = 'make',
     desc = [=[
       Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
       This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|),
       which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S|
       to escape file names in case they contain special characters.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
       about including spaces and backslashes.
       Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for
       the interpretation of a command.  When you use a filter called
       "myfilter" do it like this: >vim
           set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
       <	The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
       where the arguments will be included, for example: >vim
           set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
       <	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'makeprg',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('program to use for the ":make" command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mps',
     cb = 'did_set_matchpairs',
     defaults = '(:),{:},[:]',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
       other.
       Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot
       jump between two double quotes.
       The characters must be separated by a colon.
       The pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and
       '>' (for HTML): >vim
       	set mps+=<:>

       <	A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
       assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >vim
       	au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;

       <	For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
       the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin directory. |add-local-help|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'matchpairs',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('pairs of characters that "%" can match'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mps',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mat',
     defaults = 5,
     desc = [=[
       Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
       set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
       set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'matchtime',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('tenths of a second to show matching paren'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mat',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mco',
     defaults = macros('MAX_MCO', 'number'),
     full_name = 'maxcombine',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum nr of combining characters displayed'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mco',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mfd',
     defaults = 100,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
       catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
       more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number.  But this will use
       more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
       Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex
       command recursion, see |E169|.
       See also |:function|.
       Also used for maximum depth of callback functions.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'maxfuncdepth',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum recursive depth for user functions'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mfd',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mmd',
     defaults = 1000,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
       character to be used.  This normally catches endless mappings, like
       ":map x y" with ":map y x".  It still does not catch ":map g wg",
       because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done.  See also
       |key-mapping|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'maxmapdepth',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum recursive depth for mapping'),
     tags = { 'E223' },
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mmd',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mmp',
     defaults = 1000,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.
       The maximum value is about 2000000.  Use this to work without a limit.
       						*E363*
       When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly
       behaves like CTRL-C was typed.
       Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very
       inefficient or too complex.  This may already happen with the pattern
       `\(.\)*` on a very long line.  `.*` works much better.
       Might also happen on redraw, when syntax rules try to match a complex
       text structure.
       Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit, in
       which case you get an "Out of memory" error instead.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'maxmempattern',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum memory (in Kbyte) used for pattern search'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mmp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'msc',
     defaults = 999,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of matches shown for the search count status |shm-S|
       When the number of matches exceeds this value, Vim shows ">" instead
       of the exact count to keep searching fast.
       Note: larger values may impact performance.
       The value must be between 1 and 9999.  See also the |searchcount()|
       function.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'maxsearchcount',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum number for the search count feature'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_msc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mis',
     defaults = 25,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of items to use in a menu.  Used for menus that are
       generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu.  Changing this
       option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'menuitems',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum number of items in a menu'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mis',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mopt',
     cb = 'did_set_messagesopt',
     defaults = 'hit-enter,history:500',
     values = { 'hit-enter', 'wait:', 'history:' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Option settings for outputting messages.  It can consist of the
       following items.  Items must be separated by a comma.

       hit-enter	Use a |hit-enter| prompt when the message is longer than
       		'cmdheight' size.

       wait:{n}	Instead of using a |hit-enter| prompt, simply wait for
       		{n} milliseconds so that the user has a chance to read
       		the message.  The maximum value of {n} is 10000.  Use
       		0 to disable the wait (but then the user may miss an
       		important message).
       		This item is ignored when "hit-enter" is present, but
       		required when "hit-enter" is not present.

       history:{n}	Determines how many entries are remembered in the
       		|:messages| history.  The maximum value is 10000.
       		Setting it to zero clears the message history.
       		This item must always be present.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'messagesopt',
     list = 'onecommacolon',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('options for outputting messages'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mopt',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'msm',
     cb = 'did_set_mkspellmem',
     defaults = '460000,2000,500',
     desc = [=[
       Parameters for |:mkspell|.  This tunes when to start compressing the
       word tree.  Compression can be slow when there are many words, but
       it's needed to avoid running out of memory.  The amount of memory used
       per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why
       this tuning is complicated.

       There are three numbers, separated by commas: >
       	{start},{inc},{added}
       <
       For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory.  {start}
       gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any
       compression is done.  It should be a bit smaller than the amount of
       memory that is available to Vim.

       When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the
       amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another
       compression is done.  A low number means compression is done after
       less words are added, which is slow.  A high number means more memory
       will be allocated.

       After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before
       the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra
       amount of memory is needed.  A low number means there is a smaller
       chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's
       slower.

       The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and
       Hungarian.  The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte.  If
       you have 1 Gbyte you could use: >vim
       	set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800
       <	If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some
       languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'mkspellmem',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('memory used before |:mkspell| compresses the tree'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_msm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ml',
     defaults = {
       if_true = true,
       doc = 'on (off for root)',
     },
     desc = [=[
       If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
       checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
       no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'modeline',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('recognize modelines at start or end of file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ml',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mle',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on allow some options that are an expression to be set in the
       modeline.  Check the option for whether it is affected by
       'modelineexpr'.  Also see |modeline|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'modelineexpr',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('allow some options to be set in modeline'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_mle',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mls',
     defaults = 5,
     desc = [=[
       If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
       checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
       no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.

     ]=],
     full_name = 'modelines',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of lines checked for modelines'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mls',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ma',
     cb = 'did_set_modifiable',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When off the buffer contents cannot be changed.  The 'fileformat' and
       'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
       Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'modifiable',
     noglob = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('changes to the text are not possible'),
     tags = { 'E21' },
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ma',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mod',
     cb = 'did_set_modified',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, the buffer is considered to be modified.  This option is set
       when:
       1. A change was made to the text since it was last written.  Using the
          |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
          option.  But undoing changes that were made before writing the
          buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
          when it was written.
       2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
          value.  The original value is set when the buffer is read or
          written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
          values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
          reset.
          Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'.
       This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
       result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
       FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
       an explanation.
       When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
       will be ignored.
       Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set
       when using "rA" on an "A".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'modified',
     no_mkrc = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('buffer has been modified'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_mod',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled.  You will get
       the |more-prompt|.  When this option is off there are no pauses, the
       listing continues until finished.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'more',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('listings when the whole screen is filled'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_more',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_mouse',
     defaults = 'nvi',
     desc = [=[
       Enables mouse support. For example, to enable the mouse in Normal mode
       and Visual mode: >vim
       	set mouse=nv
       <
       To temporarily disable mouse support, hold the shift key while using
       the mouse.

       Mouse support can be enabled for different modes:
       	n	Normal mode
       	v	Visual mode
       	i	Insert mode
       	c	Command-line mode
       	h	all previous modes when editing a help file
       	a	all previous modes
       	r	for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt

       Left-click anywhere in a text buffer to place the cursor there.  This
       works with operators too, e.g. type |d| then left-click to delete text
       from the current cursor position to the position where you clicked.

       Drag the |status-line| or vertical separator of a window to resize it.

       If enabled for "v" (Visual mode) then double-click selects word-wise,
       triple-click makes it line-wise, and quadruple-click makes it
       rectangular block-wise.

       For scrolling with a mouse wheel see |scroll-mouse-wheel|.

       Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
       "* register if possible. See also 'clipboard'.

       Related options:
       'mousefocus'	window focus follows mouse pointer
       'mousemodel'	what mouse button does which action
       'mousehide'	hide mouse pointer while typing text
       'selectmode'	whether to start Select mode or Visual mode
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_mouse',
     full_name = 'mouse',
     list = 'flags',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('the use of mouse clicks'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mouse',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mousef',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
       When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
       mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus.  Off is the
       default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
       a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mousefocus',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('keyboard focus follows the mouse'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_mousef',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mh',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       		only in the GUI
       When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
       The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mousehide',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('hide mouse pointer while typing'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_mh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mousem',
     defaults = 'popup_setpos',
     values = { 'extend', 'popup', 'popup_setpos' },
     desc = [=[
       Sets the model to use for the mouse.  The name mostly specifies what
       the right mouse button is used for:
          extend	Right mouse button extends a selection.  This works
       		like in an xterm.
          popup	Right mouse button pops up a menu.  The shifted left
       		mouse button extends a selection.  This works like
       		with Microsoft Windows.
          popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
       		position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
       		selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
       		If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
       		be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move.  This implies of
       		course, that right clicking outside a selection will
       		end Visual mode.
       Overview of what button does what for each model:
       mouse		    extend		popup(_setpos) ~
       left click	    place cursor	place cursor
       left drag	    start selection	start selection
       shift-left	    search word		extend selection
       right click	    extend selection	popup menu (place cursor)
       right drag	    extend selection	-
       middle click	    paste		paste

       In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
       Nvim creates a default |popup-menu| but you can redefine it.

       Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
       See |mouse-overview|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless selection.

       Example: >vim
           map <S-LeftMouse>     <RightMouse>
           map <S-LeftDrag>      <RightDrag>
           map <S-LeftRelease>   <RightRelease>
           map <2-S-LeftMouse>   <2-RightMouse>
           map <2-S-LeftDrag>    <2-RightDrag>
           map <2-S-LeftRelease> <2-RightRelease>
           map <3-S-LeftMouse>   <3-RightMouse>
           map <3-S-LeftDrag>    <3-RightDrag>
           map <3-S-LeftRelease> <3-RightRelease>
           map <4-S-LeftMouse>   <4-RightMouse>
           map <4-S-LeftDrag>    <4-RightDrag>
           map <4-S-LeftRelease> <4-RightRelease>
       <
       Mouse commands requiring the CTRL modifier can be simulated by typing
       the "g" key before using the mouse:
           "g<LeftMouse>"  is "<C-LeftMouse>	(jump to tag under mouse click)
           "g<RightMouse>" is "<C-RightMouse>	("CTRL-T")
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mousemodel',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('changes meaning of mouse buttons'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mousem',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mousemev',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, mouse move events are delivered to the input queue and are
       available for mapping |<MouseMove>|.  The default, off, avoids the
       mouse movement overhead except when needed.
       Warning: Setting this option can make pending mappings to be aborted
       when the mouse is moved.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mousemoveevent',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('deliver mouse move events to input queue'),
     tags = { 'mouse-hover' },
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_mousemev',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_mousescroll',
     defaults = 'ver:3,hor:6',
     values = { 'hor:', 'ver:' },
     desc = [=[
       This option controls the number of lines / columns to scroll by when
       scrolling with a mouse wheel (|scroll-mouse-wheel|). The option is
       a comma-separated list. Each part consists of a direction and a count
       as follows:
       	direction:count,direction:count
       Direction is one of either "hor" or "ver". "hor" controls horizontal
       scrolling and "ver" controls vertical scrolling. Count sets the amount
       to scroll by for the given direction, it should be a non negative
       integer. Each direction should be set at most once. If a direction
       is omitted, a default value is used (6 for horizontal scrolling and 3
       for vertical scrolling). You can disable mouse scrolling by using
       a count of 0.

       Example: >vim
       	set mousescroll=ver:5,hor:2
       <	Will make Nvim scroll 5 lines at a time when scrolling vertically, and
       scroll 2 columns at a time when scrolling horizontally.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mousescroll',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('amount to scroll by when scrolling with a mouse'),
     tags = { 'E5080' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_mousescroll',
     vi_def = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mouses',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = [["i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
           m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
       different modes.  The option is a comma-separated list of parts, much
       like used for 'guicursor'.  Each part consist of a mode/location-list
       and an argument-list:
       	mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
       The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
       		In a normal window: ~
       	n	Normal mode
       	v	Visual mode
       	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
       		if not specified)
       	o	Operator-pending mode
       	i	Insert mode
       	r	Replace mode

       		Others: ~
       	c	appending to the command-line
       	ci	inserting in the command-line
       	cr	replacing in the command-line
       	m	at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
       	ml	idem, but cursor in the last line
       	e	any mode, pointer below last window
       	s	any mode, pointer on a status line
       	sd	any mode, while dragging a status line
       	vs	any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
       	vd	any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
       	a	everywhere

       The shape is one of the following:
       avail	name		looks like ~
       w x	arrow		Normal mouse pointer
       w x	blank		no pointer at all (use with care!)
       w x	beam		I-beam
       w x	updown		up-down sizing arrows
       w x	leftright	left-right sizing arrows
       w x	busy		The system's usual busy pointer
       w x	no		The system's usual "no input" pointer
         x	udsizing	indicates up-down resizing
         x	lrsizing	indicates left-right resizing
         x	crosshair	like a big thin +
         x	hand1		black hand
         x	hand2		white hand
         x	pencil		what you write with
         x	question	big ?
         x	rightup-arrow	arrow pointing right-up
       w x	up-arrow	arrow pointing up
         x	<number>	any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)

       The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
       x for X11.
       Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
       pointer.

       Example: >vim
       	set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
       <	will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
       indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
       clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mouseshape',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('shape of the mouse pointer in different modes'),
     tags = { 'E547' },
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'mouset',
     defaults = 500,
     desc = [=[
       Defines the maximum time in msec between two mouse clicks for the
       second click to be recognized as a multi click.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'mousetime',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('max time between mouse double-click'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_mouset',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'nf',
     defaults = 'bin,hex',
     values = { 'bin', 'octal', 'hex', 'alpha', 'unsigned', 'blank' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
       CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
       respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
       alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
       	incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
       	letter index a), b), etc.		*octal-nrformats*
       octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
       	to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
       hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
       	considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
       	"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
       bin	If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be
       	considered to be binary.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
       	"0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111".
       unsigned    If included, numbers are recognized as unsigned.  Thus a
       	leading dash or negative sign won't be considered as part of
       	the number.  Examples:
       	    Using CTRL-X on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2019"
       	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2021").
       	    Using CTRL-A on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2021"
       	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2019").
       	    Using CTRL-X on "0" or CTRL-A on "18446744073709551615"
       	    (2^64 - 1) has no effect, overflow is prevented.
       blank	If included, treat numbers as signed or unsigned based on
       	preceding whitespace.  If a number with a leading dash has its
       	dash immediately preceded by a non-whitespace character (i.e.,
       	not a tab or a " "), the negative sign won't be considered as
       	part of the number.  For example:
       	    Using CTRL-A on "14" in "Carbon-14" results in "Carbon-15"
       	    (without "blank" it would become "Carbon-13").
       	    Using CTRL-X on "8" in "Carbon -8" results in "Carbon -9"
       	    (because -8 is preceded by whitespace.  If "unsigned" was
       	    set, it would result in "Carbon -7").
       	If this format is included, overflow is prevented as if
       	"unsigned" were set.  If both this format and "unsigned" are
       	included, "unsigned" will take precedence.

       Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
       considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
       recognized as octal or hex.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'nrformats',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('number formats recognized for CTRL-A command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_nf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'nu',
     cb = 'did_set_number_relativenumber',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Print the line number in front of each line.  When the 'n' option is
       excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
       line numbers.
       Use the 'numberwidth' option to adjust the room for the line number.
       When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
       characters are put before the number.
       For highlighting see |hl-LineNr|, |hl-CursorLineNr|, and the
       |:sign-define| "numhl" argument.
       					*number_relativenumber*
       The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be
       relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
       four combinations (cursor in line 3):

       	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
       	'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
       >
           |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
           |pear           |  2 pear       |  1 pear       |  1 pear
           |nobody         |  3 nobody     |  0 nobody     |3   nobody
           |there          |  4 there      |  1 there      |  1 there
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'number',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('print the line number in front of each line'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'nuw',
     cb = 'did_set_numberwidth',
     defaults = 4,
     desc = [=[
       Minimal number of columns to use for the line number.  Only relevant
       when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines
       with a line number.  Since one space is always between the number and
       the text, there is one less character for the number itself.
       The value is the minimum width.  A bigger width is used when needed to
       fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of
       rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'
       is set.  Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line
       number up to 999.  When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be
       used. The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 20.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'numberwidth',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('number of columns used for the line number'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ofu',
     cb = 'did_set_omnifunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni
       completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
       See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
       invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
       function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for
       more information.
       This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
       |:filetype-plugin-on|
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'omnifunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('function for filetype-specific completion'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ofu',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'odev',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       		only for Windows
       Enable reading and writing from devices.  This may get Vim stuck on a
       device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O.  Therefore
       it is off by default.
       Note that on Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also
       result in editing a device.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'opendevice',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('allow reading/writing devices on MS-Windows'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'opfunc',
     cb = 'did_set_operatorfunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator.
       See |:map-operator| for more info and an example.  The value can be
       the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See
       |option-value-function| for more information.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'operatorfunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('function to be called for |g@| operator'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_opfunc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pp',
     cb = 'did_set_runtimepackpath',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = "see 'runtimepath'",
       meta = '...',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Directories used to find packages.
       See |packages| and |packages-runtimepath|.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'packpath',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('list of directories used for packages'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_pp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'para',
     defaults = 'IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp',
     desc = [=[
       Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs.  These are pairs
       of two letters (see |object-motions|).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'paragraphs',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('nroff macros that separate paragraphs'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_para',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_paste',
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'paste',
     pri_mkrc = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_paste',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pt',
     defaults = '',
     full_name = 'pastetoggle',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pex',
     cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
       the resulting new version of the file.  See |diff-patchexpr|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'patchexpr',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('expression used to patch a file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_pex',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pm',
     cb = 'did_set_backupext_or_patchmode',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept.  This can be used
       to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
       source distribution.  Only the first time that a file is written a
       copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
       name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
       appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
       ".orig" or ".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work
       (Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the
       new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible
       to write a backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an
       empty file is created.
       When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
       Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
       end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
       recognized as a compressed file.
       Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'patchmode',
     normal_fname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('keep the oldest version of a file'),
     tags = { 'E205', 'E206' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_pm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pa',
     defaults = '.,,',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
       |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands,
       provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not
       starting with "/", "./" or "../").  The directories in the 'path'
       option may be relative or absolute.
       - Use commas to separate directory names: >vim
       	set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
       <	- Spaces can also be used to separate directory names.  To have a
         space in a directory name, precede it with an extra backslash, and
         escape the space: >vim
       	set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
       <	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
         backslash: >vim
       	set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
       <	- To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >vim
       	set path=.
       <	- To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
         commas: >vim
       	set path=,,
       <	- A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
       - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       - When using |netrw| URLs can be used.  For example, adding
         "https://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
       - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and
         ";".  See |file-searching| for info and syntax.
       - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >vim
       	set path=.,c:\\include
       <	  Or just use '/' instead: >vim
       	set path=.,c:/include
       <	Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
       the file!
       The maximum length is limited.  How much depends on the system, mostly
       it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
       You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
       'path', see |:checkpath|.
       The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
       directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
       uses another default.  To remove the current directory use: >vim
       	set path-=
       <	To add the current directory use: >vim
       	set path+=
       <	To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
       separator.  Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
       names are separated with a semicolon: >vim
       	let &path = &path .. "," .. substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
       <	Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
       this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'path',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of directories searched with "gf" et.al.'),
     tags = { 'E343', 'E345', 'E347', 'E854' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_path',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pi',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
       indent structure as possible.  Normally the indent is replaced by a
       series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is
       enabled, in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option
       means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
       for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
       'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains
       a Tab.
       NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
       tabs and spaces.  You might not like this.
       Also see 'copyindent'.
       Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'preserveindent',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('preserve the indent structure when reindenting'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_pi',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pvh',
     defaults = 12,
     desc = [=[
       Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
       commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'previewheight',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('height of the preview window'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_pvh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pvw',
     cb = 'did_set_previewwindow',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Identifies the preview window.  Only one window can have this option
       set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
       |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'previewwindow',
     noglob = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('identifies the preview window'),
     tags = { 'E590' },
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     full_name = 'prompt',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('enable prompt in Ex mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pb',
     cb = 'did_set_pumblend',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Enables pseudo-transparency for the |popup-menu|. Valid values are in
       the range of 0 for fully opaque popupmenu (disabled) to 100 for fully
       transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.

       It is possible to override the level for individual highlights within
       the popupmenu using |highlight-blend|. For instance, to enable
       transparency but force the current selected element to be fully opaque: >vim

       	set pumblend=15
       	hi PmenuSel blend=0
       <
       UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'
     ]=],
     full_name = 'pumblend',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Controls transparency level of popup menu'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_pb',
   },
   {
     full_name = 'pumborder',
     scope = { 'global' },
     cb = 'did_set_pumborder',
     defaults = { if_true = '' },
     values = { '', 'double', 'single', 'shadow', 'rounded', 'solid', 'bold', 'none' },
     desc = [=[
       Defines the default border style of popupmenu windows. See 'winborder' for
       valid values. |hl-PmenuBorder| is used for highlighting the border, and when
       style is "shadow" the |hl-PmenuShadow| and |hl-PmenuShadowThrough| groups are used.
     ]=],
     short_desc = N_('border of popupmenu'),
     type = 'string',
     list = 'onecomma',
     varname = 'p_pumborder',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ph',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of items to show in the popup menu
       (|ins-completion-menu|). Zero means "use available screen space".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'pumheight',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum height of the popup menu'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ph',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pmw',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  When zero,
       there is no maximum width limit, otherwise the popup menu will never be
       wider than this value.  Truncated text will be indicated by "trunc"
       value of 'fillchars' option.

       This option takes precedence over 'pumwidth'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'pummaxwidth',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum width of the popup menu'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_pmw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pw',
     defaults = 15,
     desc = [=[
       Minimum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  If the
       cursor column + 'pumwidth' exceeds screen width, the popup menu is
       nudged to fit on the screen.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'pumwidth',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum width of the popup menu'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_pw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'pyx',
     defaults = 3,
     desc = [=[
       Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands
       |python_x|.  As only Python 3 is supported, this always has the value
       `3`. Setting any other value is an error.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'pyxversion',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('selects default python version to use'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_pyx',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'qftf',
     cb = 'did_set_quickfixtextfunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies a function to be used to get the text to display
       in the quickfix and location list windows.  This can be used to
       customize the information displayed in the quickfix or location window
       for each entry in the corresponding quickfix or location list.  See
       |quickfix-window-function| for an explanation of how to write the
       function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
       |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for more
       information.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       evaluating 'qftf' |textlock|.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'quickfixtextfunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('customize the quickfix window'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_qftf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'qe',
     defaults = '\\',
     desc = [=[
       The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string.  Used for
       objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
       When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
       the following character will be skipped.  The default value makes the
       text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'quoteescape',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('escape characters used in a string'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_qe',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ro',
     cb = 'did_set_readonly',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'.  Protects you from
       accidentally overwriting a file.  Default on when Vim is started
       in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
       When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
       buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
       When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is set for the
       newly edited buffer.
       See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'readonly',
     noglob = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('disallow writing the buffer'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ro',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'rdb',
     defaults = '',
     values = {
       'compositor',
       'nothrottle',
       'invalid',
       'nodelta',
       'line',
       'flush',
     },
     flags = true,
     desc = [=[
       Flags to change the way redrawing works, for debugging purposes.
       Most useful with 'writedelay' set to some reasonable value.
       Supports the following flags:
           compositor	Indicate each redraw event handled by the compositor
       		by briefly flashing the redrawn regions in colors
       		indicating the redraw type. These are the highlight
       		groups used (and their default colors):
       	RedrawDebugNormal   gui=reverse   normal redraw passed through
       	RedrawDebugClear    guibg=Yellow  clear event passed through
       	RedrawDebugComposed guibg=Green   redraw event modified by the
       					  compositor (due to
       					  overlapping grids, etc)
       	RedrawDebugRecompose guibg=Red    redraw generated by the
       					  compositor itself, due to a
       					  grid being moved or deleted.
           line	introduce a delay after each line drawn on the screen.
       		When using the TUI or another single-grid UI, "compositor"
       		gives more information and should be preferred (every
       		line is processed as a separate event by the compositor)
           flush	introduce a delay after each "flush" event.
           nothrottle	Turn off throttling of the message grid. This is an
       		optimization that joins many small scrolls to one
       		larger scroll when drawing the message area (with
       		'display' msgsep flag active).
           invalid	Enable stricter checking (abort) of inconsistencies
       		of the internal screen state. This is mostly
       		useful when running nvim inside a debugger (and
       		the test suite).
           nodelta	Send all internally redrawn cells to the UI, even if
       		they are unchanged from the already displayed state.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'redrawdebug',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Changes the way redrawing works (debug)'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_rdb',
     flags_varname = 'rdb_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'rdt',
     defaults = 2000,
     desc = [=[
       Time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  Applies to
       'hlsearch', 'inccommand', |:match| highlighting, syntax highlighting,
       and async |LanguageTree:parse()|.
       When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
       matches will be highlighted.
       For syntax highlighting the time applies per window.  When over the
       limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used.
       This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated
       pattern.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'redrawtime',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("timeout for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting"),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_rdt',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 're',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines|
       The possible values are:
       	0	automatic selection
       	1	old engine
       	2	NFA engine
       Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something
       that is not supported the pattern will not match.  This is only useful
       for debugging the regexp engine.
       Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the
       default engine becomes too costly.  E.g., when the NFA engine uses too
       many states.  This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of
       a complex pattern with long text.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'regexpengine',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('default regexp engine to use'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_re',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'rnu',
     cb = 'did_set_number_relativenumber',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of
       each line.  Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can
       precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without
       having to calculate it yourself.  Especially useful in combination
       with other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).
       When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will
       not use the column of line numbers.
       The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
       number.
       When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
       characters are put before the number.
       See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
       the number.

       The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of
       'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two
       options.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'relativenumber',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('show relative line number in front of each line'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     full_name = 'remap',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     defaults = 2,
     desc = [=[
       Threshold for reporting number of lines changed.  When the number of
       changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
       ":" commands.  If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
       For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
       instead of the number of lines.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'report',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('for reporting nr. of lines changed'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_report',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ri',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
       backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
       command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'revins',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('inserting characters will work backwards'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ri',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'rl',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
       that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
       Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
       are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
       This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
       simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
       useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
       and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
       in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'rightleft',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('window is right-to-left oriented'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'rlc',
     defaults = 'search',
     values = { 'search' },
     desc = [=[
       Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
       right-to-left mode for a group of commands:

       	search		"/" and "?" commands

       This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
       The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'rightleftcmd',
     list = 'comma',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('commands for which editing works right-to-left'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ru',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
       comma.  When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
       text in the file is shown on the far right:
       	Top	first line is visible
       	Bot	last line is visible
       	All	first and last line are visible
       	45%	relative position in the file
       If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
       Each window has its own ruler.  If a window has a status line, the
       ruler is shown there.  If a window doesn't have a status line and
       'cmdheight' is zero, the ruler is not shown.  Otherwise it is shown in
       the last line of the screen.  If the statusline is given by
       'statusline' (i.e. not empty), this option takes precedence over
       'ruler' and 'rulerformat'.
       If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
       bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multibyte character), both
       the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
       separated with a dash.
       For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
       For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
       If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
       you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'ruler',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('show cursor line and column in the status line'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ru',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ruf',
     cb = 'did_set_rulerformat',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
       string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
       The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       The default ruler width is 17 characters.  To make the ruler 15
       characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
       Example: >vim
       	set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'rulerformat',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('custom format for the ruler'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ruf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'rtp',
     cb = 'did_set_runtimepackpath',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = [["$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim,
                    $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim,
                    $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim,
                    …
                    $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site,
                    $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site,
                    $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site,
                    …
                    $VIMRUNTIME,
                    …
                    $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site/after,
                    $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site/after,
                    $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site/after,
                    …
                    $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim/after,
                    $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim/after,
                    $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim/after"]],
       meta = '...',
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of directories to be searched for these runtime files:
         filetype.lua	filetypes |new-filetype|
         autoload/	automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
         colors/	color scheme files |:colorscheme|
         compiler/	compiler files |:compiler|
         doc/		documentation |write-local-help|
         ftplugin/	filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
         indent/	indent scripts |indent-expression|
         keymap/	key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
         lang/		menu translations |:menutrans|
         lsp/		LSP client configurations |lsp-config|
         lua/		|Lua| plugins
         menu.vim	GUI menus |menu.vim|
         pack/		packages |:packadd|
         parser/	|treesitter| syntax parsers
         plugin/	plugin scripts |write-plugin|
         queries/	|treesitter| queries
         rplugin/	|remote-plugin| scripts
         spell/	spell checking files |spell|
         syntax/	syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
         tutor/	tutorial files |:Tutor|

       And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.

       Defaults are setup to search these locations:
       1. Your home directory, for personal preferences.
          Given by `stdpath("config")`.  |$XDG_CONFIG_HOME|
       2. Directories which must contain configuration files according to
          |xdg| ($XDG_CONFIG_DIRS, defaults to /etc/xdg).  This also contains
          preferences from system administrator.
       3. Data home directory, for plugins installed by user.
          Given by `stdpath("data")/site`.  |$XDG_DATA_HOME|
       4. nvim/site subdirectories for each directory in $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
          This is for plugins which were installed by system administrator,
          but are not part of the Nvim distribution. XDG_DATA_DIRS defaults
          to /usr/local/share/:/usr/share/, so system administrators are
          expected to install site plugins to /usr/share/nvim/site.
       5. $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Nvim.
       						*after-directory*
       6, 7, 8, 9. In after/ subdirectories of 1, 2, 3 and 4, with reverse
          ordering.  This is for preferences to overrule or add to the
          distributed defaults or system-wide settings (rarely needed).

       						*packages-runtimepath*
       "start" packages will also be searched (|runtime-search-path|) for
       runtime files after these, though such packages are not explicitly
       reported in &runtimepath. But "opt" packages are explicitly added to
       &runtimepath by |:packadd|.

       Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
       wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
       runtime files.  For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
       wildcards.
       See |:runtime|.
       Example: >vim
       	set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
       <	This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
       personal Nvim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim", and finally
       "$VIMRUNTIME" (the default runtime files).
       You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME to find files which replace
       distributed runtime files.  You can put a directory after $VIMRUNTIME
       to find files which add to distributed runtime files.

       With |--clean| the home directory entries are not included.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = 'nodefault',
     full_name = 'runtimepath',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('list of directories used for runtime files'),
     tags = { 'vimfiles' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_rtp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'scr',
     defaults = {
       if_true = 0,
       doc = 'half the window height',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands.  Will be
       set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
       changes.  This may happen when enabling the |status-line| or
       'tabline' option after setting the 'scroll' option.
       If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
       be used as the new value for 'scroll'.  Reset to half the window
       height with ":set scroll=0".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'scroll',
     no_mkrc = true,
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'scbk',
     cb = 'did_set_scrollback',
     defaults = {
       if_true = -1,
       doc = '10000',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of lines kept beyond the visible screen. Lines at the
       top are deleted if new lines exceed this limit.
       Minimum is 1, maximum is 1000000.
       Only in |terminal| buffers.

       Note: Lines that are not visible and kept in scrollback are not
       reflown when the terminal buffer is resized horizontally.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'scrollback',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_scbk',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'scb',
     cb = 'did_set_scrollbind',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, scrolling the
       current window also scrolls other scrollbind windows (windows that
       also have this option set).  This option is useful for viewing the
       differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
       See 'scrollopt' for options that determine how this option should be
       interpreted.
       This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
       file.  This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
       with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'scrollbind',
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('scroll in window as other windows scroll'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sj',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
       screen (e.g., with "j").  Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
       CTRL-D).  Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
       When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the
       percentage of the window height.  Thus -50 scrolls half the window
       height.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'scrolljump',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines to scroll'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_sj',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'so',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
       This will make some context visible around where you are working.  If
       you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
       in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
       when long lines wrap).
       After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
       these two: >vim
       	setlocal scrolloff<
       	setlocal scrolloff=-1
       <	For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'scrolloff',
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum nr. of lines above and below cursor'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_so',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sbo',
     defaults = 'ver,jump',
     values = { 'ver', 'hor', 'jump' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
       'scrollbind' windows should behave.  'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
       Options.
       The following words are available:
           ver		Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
           hor		Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
           jump	Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
       		scrolling.  This offset is the difference in the first
       		displayed line of the bound windows.  When moving
       		around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
       		reach a position before the start or after the end of
       		the buffer.  The offset is not changed though, when
       		moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
       		to the desired position when possible.
       		When now making that window the current one, two
       		things can be done with the relative offset:
       		1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
       		   adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
       		   window.  When going back to the other window, the
       		   new relative offset will be used.
       		2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
       		   scrolled to keep the same relative offset.  When
       		   going back to the other window, it still uses the
       		   same relative offset.
       Also see |scroll-binding|.
       When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,
       even when "ver" isn't there.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'scrollopt',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("how 'scrollbind' should behave"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sbo',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sect',
     defaults = 'SHNHH HUnhsh',
     desc = [=[
       Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections.  These are pairs of
       two letters (See |object-motions|).  The default makes a section start
       at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'sections',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('nroff macros that separate sections'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sections',
   },
   {
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'secure',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_secure',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sel',
     cb = 'did_set_selection',
     defaults = 'inclusive',
     values = { 'inclusive', 'exclusive', 'old' },
     desc = [=[
       This option defines the behavior of the selection.  It is only used
       in Visual and Select mode.
       Possible values:
          value	past line     inclusive ~
          old		   no		yes
          inclusive	   yes		yes
          exclusive	   yes		no
       "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
       character past the line.
       "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
       in an operation.  For example, when "x" is used to delete the
       selection.
       When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past
       the end of line the line break still isn't included.
       When "exclusive" is used, cursor position in visual mode will be
       adjusted for inclusive motions |inclusive-motion-selection-exclusive|.

       Note:
       - When "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end backwards, you
         cannot include the last character of a line, when starting in Normal
         mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
       - when "exclusive" is used with a single character visual selection,
         Vim will behave as if the 'selection' is inclusive (in other words,
         you cannot visually select an empty region).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'selection',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('what type of selection to use'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sel',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'slm',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'mouse', 'key', 'cmd' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This is a comma-separated list of words, which specifies when to start
       Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
       Possible values:
          mouse	when using the mouse
          key		when using shifted special keys
          cmd		when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
       See |Select-mode|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'selectmode',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('when to use Select mode instead of Visual mode'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_slm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ssop',
     cb = 'did_set_sessionoptions',
     defaults = 'blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,tabpages,winsize,terminal',
     -- Also used for 'viewoptions'.
     values = {
       'buffers',
       'winpos',
       'resize',
       'winsize',
       'localoptions',
       'options',
       'help',
       'blank',
       'globals',
       'slash',
       'unix',
       'sesdir',
       'curdir',
       'folds',
       'cursor',
       'tabpages',
       'terminal',
       'skiprtp',
     },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma-
       separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
       something:
          word		save and restore ~
          blank	empty windows
          buffers	hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
          curdir	the current directory
          folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
       		fold options
          globals	global variables that start with an uppercase letter
       		and contain at least one lowercase letter.  Only
       		String and Number types are stored.
          help		the help window
          localoptions	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
       		global values for local options)
          options	all options and mappings (also global values for local
       		options)
          skiprtp	exclude 'runtimepath' and 'packpath' from the options
          resize	size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
          sesdir	the directory in which the session file is located
       		will become the current directory (useful with
       		projects accessed over a network from different
       		systems)
          tabpages	all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
       		is restored, so that you can make a session for each
       		tab page separately
          terminal	include terminal windows where the command can be
       		restored
          winpos	position of the whole Vim window
          winsize	window sizes
          slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
          unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.

       Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". When neither is included
       filenames are stored as absolute paths.
       If you leave out "options" many things won't work well after restoring
       the session.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'sessionoptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('options for |:mksession|'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ssop',
     flags_varname = 'ssop_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sd',
     alias = { 'vi', 'viminfo' },
     cb = 'did_set_shada',
     defaults = "!,'100,<50,s10,h,r/tmp/,r/private/",
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty, the shada file is read upon startup and written
       when exiting Vim (see |shada-file|).  The string should be a comma-
       separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
       identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
       which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
       character is left out, then the default value is used for that
       parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
       the effect of their value.
       CHAR	VALUE	~
       						*shada-!*
       !	When included, save and restore global variables that start
       	with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
       	letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
       	and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
       	read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
       						*shada-quote*
       "	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
       	the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
       	backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
       	start of a comment!
       						*shada-%*
       %	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
       	started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
       	restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
       	buffer list is restored from the shada file.  Quickfix
       	('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on
       	removable media (|shada-r|) are not saved.
       	When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
       	number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
       	buffers are stored.
       						*shada-'*
       '	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
       	are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
       	'shada' is non-empty.
       	If non-zero, then the |jumplist| and the |changelist| are also
       	stored in the shada file.
       						*shada-/*
       /	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
       	saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
       	patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
       	'history' is used.
       						*shada-:*
       :	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
       	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
       						*shada-<*
       \<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
       	registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
       	saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
       	Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in KiB.
       						*shada-@*
       @	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
       	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
       						*shada-c*
       c	Dummy option, kept for compatibility reasons.  Has no actual
       	effect: ShaDa always uses UTF-8 and 'encoding' value is fixed
       	to UTF-8 as well.
       						*shada-f*
       f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
       	to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
       	non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
       	cursor position (when exiting or when doing |:wshada|).
       						*shada-h*
       h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the shada
       	file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
       	has been used since the last search command.
       						*shada-n*
       n	Name of the shada file.  The name must immediately follow
       	the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the
       	'shadafile' option is set, that file name overrides the one
       	given here with 'shada'.  Environment variables are
       	expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
       						*shada-r*
       r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
       	',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
       	specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
       	stored.  This is to avoid removable media.  For Windows you
       	could use "ra:,rb:".  You can also use it for temp files,
       	e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is ignored.
       						*shada-s*
       s	Maximum size of an item contents in KiB.  If zero then nothing
       	is saved.  Unlike Vim this applies to all items, except for
       	the buffer list and header.  Full item size is off by three
       	unsigned integers: with `s10` maximum item size may be 1 byte
       	(type: 7-bit integer) + 9 bytes (timestamp: up to 64-bit
       	integer) + 3 bytes (item size: up to 16-bit integer because
       	2^8 < 10240 < 2^16) + 10240 bytes (requested maximum item
       	contents size) = 10253 bytes.

       Example: >vim
           set shada='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/nvim/shada
       <
       '50		Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
       		edited.
       <1000		Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
       		remembered.
       s100		Items with contents occupying more then 100 KiB are
       		skipped.
       :0		Command-line history will not be saved.
       n~/nvim/shada	The name of the file to use is "~/nvim/shada".
       no /		Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
       		that is, save all of the search history, and also the
       		previous search and substitute patterns.
       no %		The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
       no h		'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.

       When setting 'shada' from an empty value you can use |:rshada| to
       load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shada',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('use .shada file upon startup and exiting'),
     tags = { 'E526', 'E527', 'E528' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_shada',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sdf',
     alias = { 'vif', 'viminfofile' },
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty, overrides the file name used for |shada| (viminfo).
       When equal to "NONE" no shada file will be read or written.
       This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag.  The |--clean|
       command line flag sets it to "NONE".
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'shadafile',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('overrides the filename used for shada'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_shadafile',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sh',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = 'sh',
       if_true = 'cmd.exe',
       doc = '$SHELL or "sh", Win32: "cmd.exe"',
       meta = 'sh',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands.  When changing the
       value also check these options: 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
       'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
       It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.  "csh -f".
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.

       If the name of the shell contains a space, you need to enclose it in
       quotes.  Example with quotes: >vim
       	set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
       <	Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
       each space (to avoid ending the option value), so better use |:let-&|
       like this: >vim
       	let &shell='"C:\Program Files\unix\sh.exe" -f'
       <	Also note that the "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not
       part of the command name.
       						*shell-unquoting*
       Rules regarding quotes:
       1. Option is split on space and tab characters that are not inside
          quotes: "abc def" runs shell named "abc" with additional argument
          "def", '"abc def"' runs shell named "abc def" with no additional
          arguments (here and below: additional means “additional to
          'shellcmdflag'”).
       2. Quotes in option may be present in any position and any number:
          '"abc"', '"a"bc', 'a"b"c', 'ab"c"' and '"a"b"c"' are all equivalent
          to just "abc".
       3. Inside quotes backslash preceding backslash means one backslash.
          Backslash preceding quote means one quote. Backslash preceding
          anything else means backslash and next character literally:
          '"a\\b"' is the same as "a\b", '"a\\"b"' runs shell named literally
          'a"b', '"a\b"' is the same as "a\b" again.
       4. Outside of quotes backslash always means itself, it cannot be used
          to escape quote: 'a\"b"' is the same as "a\b".
       Note that such processing is done after |:set| did its own round of
       unescaping, so to keep yourself sane use |:let-&| like shown above.
       						*shell-powershell*
       To use PowerShell: >vim
          set noshelltemp
          let &shell = 'powershell'
          let &shellcmdflag = '-NoLogo -NoProfile -ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned -Command '
          let &shellcmdflag .= '[Console]::InputEncoding=[Console]::OutputEncoding=[System.Text.UTF8Encoding]::new();'
          let &shellcmdflag .= '$PSDefaultParameterValues[''Out-File:Encoding'']=''utf8'';'
          let &shellpipe  = '> %s 2>&1'
          set shellquote= shellxquote=
       <
       						*shell-pwsh*
       To use pwsh, use the above settings with `let &shell = 'pwsh'`, and
       add: >vim
          let &shellcmdflag .= '$PSStyle.OutputRendering = ''PlainText'';'
          " Workaround (may not be needed in future version of pwsh):
          let $__SuppressAnsiEscapeSequences = 1
       <
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'shell',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('name of shell to use for external commands'),
     tags = { 'E91' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'shcf',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = '-c',
       if_true = '/s /c',
       doc = '"-c"; Windows: "/s /c"',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
       `bash.exe -c ls` or `cmd.exe /s /c "dir"`.  For MS-Windows, the
       default is set according to the value of 'shell', to reduce the need
       to set this option by the user.
       On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
       part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
       See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
       See |shell-unquoting| which talks about separating this option into
       multiple arguments.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shellcmdflag',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('flag to shell to execute one command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_shcf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sp',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = '| tee',
       if_true = '2>&1| tee',
       doc = '">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee"',
     },
     desc = [=[
       String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
       error file.  See also |:make_makeprg|.  See |option-backslash| about
       including spaces and backslashes.
       The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
       (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
       of this option).
       For MS-Windows the default is "2>&1| tee".  The stdout and stderr are
       saved in a file and echoed to the screen.
       For Unix the default is "| tee".  The stdout of the compiler is saved
       in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
       "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
       'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
       "bash", "fish", "ash" or "dash" the default becomes "2>&1| tee".  This
       means that stderr is also included.  Before using the 'shell' option a
       path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh".
       The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
       and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
       there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
       explicitly set before.
       When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
       ":make" output will be done.  This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
       that writes to 'makeef' by itself.  If you want no piping, but do
       want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
       Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
       In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
       become obsolete (at least for Unix).
       Note: When using a pipe like "| tee", you'll lose the exit code of the
       shell command.  This might be configurable by your shell, look for
       the pipefail option (for bash and zsh, use ":set -o pipefail").
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shellpipe',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('string to put output of ":make" in error file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'shq',
     defaults = {
       if_true = '',
       doc = [[""; Windows, when 'shell'
              contains "sh" somewhere: "\""]],
     },
     desc = [=[
       Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
       the "!" and ":!" commands.  The redirection is kept outside of the
       quoting.  See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection.  It's
       probably not useful to set both options.
       This is an empty string by default.  Only known to be useful for
       third-party shells on Windows systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
       or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted according
       the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
       user.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shellquote',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('quote character(s) for around shell command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_shq',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'srr',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = '>',
       if_true = '>%s 2>&1',
       doc = '">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1"',
     },
     desc = [=[
       String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
       file.  See also |:!|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
       and backslashes.
       The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
       (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
       of this option).
       The default is ">".  For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh" or
       "tcsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&".  If the
       'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
       "bash" or "fish", the default becomes ">%s 2>&1".  This means that
       stderr is also included.  For Win32, the Unix checks are done and
       additionally "cmd" is checked for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1".
       Also, the same names with ".exe" appended are checked for.
       The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
       and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
       there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
       explicitly set before.
       In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
       become obsolete (at least for Unix).
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shellredir',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('string to put output of filter in a temp file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_srr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ssl',
     cb = 'did_set_shellslash',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_true = false,
       if_false = true,
       doc = 'on, Windows: off',
     },
     desc = [=[
       		only modifiable in MS-Windows
       When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names.  This is
       useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of cmd.exe.  Backward
       slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to forward slashes by
       Vim.
       Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
       existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
       any file for best results.  This might change in the future.
       'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
       separator.  To test if this is so use: >vim
       	if exists('+shellslash')
       <	Also see 'completeslash'.
     ]=],
     enable_if = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
     full_name = 'shellslash',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('use forward slash for shell file names'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ssl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'stmp',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, use temp files for shell commands.  When off use a pipe.
       When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
       The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
       and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
       The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
       can be detected.
       The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
       |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
       'shelltemp' is off.
       |system()| does not respect this option, it always uses pipes.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shelltemp',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('whether to use a temp file for shell commands'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_stmp',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sxe',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this
       option will be escaped with a '^' character.  This makes it possible
       to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shellxescape',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_("characters to escape when 'shellxquote' is ("),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sxe',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sxq',
     defaults = {
       condition = 'MSWIN',
       if_false = '',
       if_true = '"',
       doc = '"", Windows: "\\""',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
       the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
       'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
       to set both options.
       When the value is '(' then ')' is appended.  When the value is '"('
       then ')"' is appended.
       When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shellxquote',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_("like 'shellquote', but include redirection"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sxq',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sr',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'.  Applies to > and <
       commands.  CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
       a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shiftround',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('round indent to multiple of shiftwidth'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sw',
     cb = 'did_set_shiftwidth_tabstop',
     defaults = 8,
     desc = [=[
       Number of columns that make up one level of (auto)indentation.  Used
       by 'cindent', |<<|, |>>|, etc.
       If set to 0, Vim uses the current 'tabstop' value.  Use |shiftwidth()|
       to obtain the effective value in scripts.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'shiftwidth',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_sw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'shm',
     cb = 'did_set_shortmess',
     defaults = 'ltToOCF',
     desc = [=[
       This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
       messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
       It is a list of flags:
        flag	meaning when present	~
         l	use "999L, 888B" instead of "999 lines, 888 bytes"	*shm-l*
         m	use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"			*shm-m*
         r	use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"			*shm-r*
         w	use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message	*shm-w*
       	and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
         a	all of the above abbreviations				*shm-a*

         o	overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent	*shm-o*
       	message for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when
       	'autowrite' on)
         O	message for reading a file overwrites any previous	*shm-O*
       	message;  also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn")
         s	don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or	*shm-s*
       	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages; when using
       	the search count do not show "W" before the count message
       	(see |shm-S| below)
         t	truncate file message at the start if it is too long	*shm-t*
       	to fit on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most
       	column; ignored in Ex mode
         T	truncate other messages in the middle if they are too	*shm-T*
       	long to fit on the command line; "..." will appear in the
       	middle; ignored in Ex mode
         W	don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file	*shm-W*
         A	don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing	*shm-A*
       	swap file is found
         I	don't give the intro message when starting Vim,		*shm-I*
       	see |:intro|
         c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages; for		*shm-c*
       	example, "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only
       	match", "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
         C	don't give messages while scanning for ins-completion	*shm-C*
       	items, for instance "scanning tags"
         q	do not show "recording @a" when recording a macro	*shm-q*
         F	don't give the file info when editing a file, like	*shm-F*
       	`:silent` was used for the command; note that this also
       	affects messages from 'autoread' reloading
         S	do not show search count message when searching, e.g.	*shm-S*
       	"[1/5]".  When the "S" flag is not present (e.g. search count
       	is shown), the "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" and
       	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages are only
       	indicated by a "W" (Mnemonic: Wrapped) letter before the
       	search count statistics.  The maximum limit can be set with
       	the 'maxsearchcount' option, see also |searchcount()|
       	function.

       This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
       requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
       possible for the space available.  To get the whole message that you
       would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
       Useful values:
           shm=	No abbreviation of message.
           shm=a	Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
           shm=at	Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_shortmess',
     full_name = 'shortmess',
     list = 'flags',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('list of flags, reduce length of messages'),
     tags = { 'E1336' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_shm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sbr',
     cb = 'did_set_showbreak',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
       values are "> " or "+++ ": >vim
       	let &showbreak = "> "
       	let &showbreak = '+++ '
       <	Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
       comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
       part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
       The |hl-NonText| highlight group determines the highlighting.
       Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
       If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
       "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
       A window-local value overrules a global value.  If the global value is
       set and you want no value in the current window use NONE: >vim
       	setlocal showbreak=NONE
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showbreak',
     redraw = { 'all_windows' },
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('string to use at the start of wrapped lines'),
     tags = { 'E595' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sbr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sc',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen.  Set this
       option off if your terminal is slow.
       In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
       - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
         If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"
         means two characters and six bytes.
       - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
       - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:
         {lines}x{columns}.
       This information can be displayed in an alternative location using the
       'showcmdloc' option, useful when 'cmdheight' is 0.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showcmd',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('show (partial) command in status line'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sloc',
     cb = 'did_set_showcmdloc',
     defaults = 'last',
     values = { 'last', 'statusline', 'tabline' },
     desc = [=[
       This option can be used to display the (partially) entered command in
       another location.  Possible values are:
         last		Last line of the screen (default).
         statusline	Status line of the current window.
         tabline	First line of the screen if 'showtabline' is enabled.
       Setting this option to "statusline" or "tabline" means that these will
       be redrawn whenever the command changes, which can be on every key
       pressed.
       The %S 'statusline' item can be used in 'statusline' or 'tabline' to
       place the text.  Without a custom 'statusline' or 'tabline' it will be
       displayed in a convenient location.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showcmdloc',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('change location of partial command'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sloc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sft',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
       tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
       pattern (if there is one) as possible matches.  Thus, if you have
       matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
       required (coding style permitting).
       Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in
       'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not
       match the typed text.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showfulltag',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('show full tag pattern when completing tag'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sft',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sm',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one.  The
       jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
       show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
       A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
       seen or not).
       When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
       will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
       See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
       blinking when showing the match.
       The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
       matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
       matches.
       Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving
       around |pi_paren.txt|.
       Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showmatch',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('briefly jump to matching bracket if insert one'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'smd',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
       The |hl-ModeMsg| highlight group determines the highlighting.
       The option has no effect when 'cmdheight' is zero.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showmode',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('message on status line to show current mode'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_smd',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'stal',
     cb = 'did_set_showtabline',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels
       will be displayed:
       	0: never
       	1: only if there are at least two tab pages
       	2: always
       This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages
       line.
       See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'showtabline',
     redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('tells when the tab pages line is displayed'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_stal',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ss',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally.  Used only when
       the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
       When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
       When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0.  Not used
       for "zh" and "zl" commands.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'sidescroll',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum number of columns to scroll horizontal'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ss',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'siso',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
       right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set.  Setting this option to a
       value greater than 0 while having 'sidescroll' also at a non-zero
       value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
       horizontally (except at beginning of the line).  Setting this option
       to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor
       horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too
       close to the beginning of the line.
       After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
       these two: >vim
       	setlocal sidescrolloff<
       	setlocal sidescrolloff=-1
       <
       Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as in the
       	 following example to never allow the cursor to move onto the
       	 "extends" character: >vim

       	 set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
       	 set sidescrolloff=1
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'sidescrolloff',
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('min. nr. of columns to left and right of cursor'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_siso',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'scl',
     cb = 'did_set_signcolumn',
     defaults = 'auto',
     values = {
       'yes',
       'no',
       'auto',
       'auto:1',
       'auto:2',
       'auto:3',
       'auto:4',
       'auto:5',
       'auto:6',
       'auto:7',
       'auto:8',
       'auto:9',
       'yes:1',
       'yes:2',
       'yes:3',
       'yes:4',
       'yes:5',
       'yes:6',
       'yes:7',
       'yes:8',
       'yes:9',
       'number',
     },
     desc = [=[
       When and how to draw the signcolumn.  Valid values are:
          "auto"	only when there is a sign to display
          "auto:[1-9]" resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
       		given number (maximum 9), e.g. "auto:4"
          "auto:[1-8]-[2-9]"
       		resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
       		given maximum number (maximum 9) while keeping
       		at least the given minimum (maximum 8) fixed
       		space. The minimum number should always be less
       		than the maximum number, e.g. "auto:2-5"
          "no"		never
          "yes"	always
          "yes:[1-9]"  always, with fixed space for signs up to the given
       		number (maximum 9), e.g. "yes:3"
          "number"	display signs in the 'number' column.  If the number
       		column is not present, then behaves like "auto".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'signcolumn',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('when to display the sign column'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'scs',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
       case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
       'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
       ":g" and ":s" and when filtering matches for the completion menu
       |compl-states|.
       Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After "*" and "#" you
       can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, recalling the search
       pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'smartcase',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('no ignore case when pattern has uppercase'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_scs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'si',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line.  Works for C-like
       programs, but can also be used for other languages.  'cindent' does
       something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
       see |C-indenting|.  When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set,
       setting 'si' has no effect.  'indentexpr' is a more advanced
       alternative.
       Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
       An indent is automatically inserted:
       - After a line ending in "{".
       - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
       - Before a line starting with "}" (only with the "O" command).
       When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
       given the same indent as the matching "{".
       When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
       that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column.  The indent
       is restored for the next line.  If you don't want this, use this
       mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
       When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
       right.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'smartindent',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('smart autoindenting for C programs'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_si',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sta',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When enabled, the <Tab> key will indent by 'shiftwidth' if the cursor
       is in leading whitespace.  The <BS> key has the opposite effect.
       In leading whitespace, this has the same effect as setting
       'softtabstop' to the value of 'shiftwidth'.
       NOTE: in most cases, using 'softtabstop' is a better option.  Have a
       look at section |30.5| of the user guide for detailed
       explanations on how Vim works with tabs and spaces.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'smarttab',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("use 'shiftwidth' when inserting <Tab>"),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sta',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sms',
     cb = 'did_set_smoothscroll',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Scrolling works with screen lines.  When 'wrap' is set and the first
       line in the window wraps part of it may not be visible, as if it is
       above the window.  "<<<" is displayed at the start of the first line,
       highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
       You may also want to add "lastline" to the 'display' option to show as
       much of the last line as possible.
       NOTE: partly implemented, doesn't work yet for |gj| and |gk|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'smoothscroll',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_("scroll by screen lines when 'wrap' is set"),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sts',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Create soft tab stops, separated by 'softtabstop' number of columns.
       In Insert mode, pressing the <Tab> key will move the cursor to the
       next soft tab stop, instead of inserting a literal tab.  <BS> behaves
       similarly in reverse.  Vim inserts a minimal mix of tab and space
       characters to produce the visual effect.

       This setting does not affect the display of existing tab characters.

       A value of 0 disables this behaviour.  A negative value makes Vim use
       'shiftwidth'.  If you plan to use 'sts' and 'shiftwidth' with
       different values, you might consider setting 'smarttab'.

       The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' alters tab behavior when 'list' is
       enabled.  See also |ins-expandtab| and user manual section |30.5| for
       in-depth explanations.

       The value of 'softtabstop' will be ignored if 'varsofttabstop' is set
       to anything other than an empty string.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'softtabstop',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('number of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_sts',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_spell',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on spell checking will be done.  See |spell|.
       The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'spell',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('spell checking'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'spc',
     cb = 'did_set_spellcapcheck',
     defaults = '[.?!]\\_[\\])\'"\\t ]\\+',
     desc = [=[
       Pattern to locate the end of a sentence.  The following word will be
       checked to start with a capital letter.  If not then it is highlighted
       with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled).
       When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
       Only used when 'spell' is set.
       Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
       including spaces and backslashes.
       To set this option automatically depending on the language, see
       |set-spc-auto|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'spellcapcheck',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('pattern to locate end of a sentence'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_spc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'spf',
     cb = 'did_set_spellfile',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
       commands.  It must end in ".{encoding}.add".  You need to include the
       path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
       The path may include characters from 'isfname', ' ', ',', '@' and ':'.
       							*E765*
       It may also be a comma-separated list of names.  A count before the
       |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
       a personal word list file and a project word list file.
       When a word is added while this option is empty Nvim will use
       (and auto-create) `stdpath('data')/site/spell/`. For the file name the
       first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, ignoring the
       region.
       The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
       have to appear in 'spelllang'.
       Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
       name if you want to.  However, it will then only be used when
       'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
       without region name will be found.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'spellfile',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('files where |zg| and |zw| store words'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_spf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'spl',
     cb = 'did_set_spelllang',
     defaults = 'en',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of word list names.  When the 'spell' option is
       on spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >vim
       	set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
       <	This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized.  Words
       that are not recognized will be highlighted.
       The word list name must consist of alphanumeric characters, a dash or
       an underscore.  It should not include a comma or dot.  Using a dash is
       recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
       specification.  Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
       A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
       the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
       region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
       English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
       Britain.  (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than
       en_ca, en_gb and en_us).
       If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from
       spell checking.  This is useful when editing text that also has Asian
       words.
       Note that the "medical" dictionary does not exist, it is just an
       example of a longer name.
       						*E757*
       As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is.  The
       first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
       (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
       This is mainly for testing purposes.  You must make sure the correct
       encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
       How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.

       If the |spellfile.lua| plugin is active and you use a language name
       for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin
       will ask you if you want to download the file.

       After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files
       "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'.  "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'
       up to the first character that is not an ASCII letter or number and
       not a dash.  Also see |set-spc-auto|.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'spelllang',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('language(s) to do spell checking for'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_spl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'spo',
     cb = 'did_set_spelloptions',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'camel', 'noplainbuffer' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of options for spell checking:
       camel		When a word is CamelCased, assume "Cased" is a
       		separate word: every upper-case character in a word
       		that comes after a lower case character indicates the
       		start of a new word.
       noplainbuffer	Only spellcheck a buffer when 'syntax' is enabled,
       		or when extmarks are set within the buffer. Only
       		designated regions of the buffer are spellchecked in
       		this case.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'spelloptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_spo',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sps',
     cb = 'did_set_spellsuggest',
     defaults = 'best',
     -- Keep this in sync with spell_check_sps().
     values = { 'best', 'fast', 'double', 'expr:', 'file:', 'timeout:' },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Methods used for spelling suggestions.  Both for the |z=| command and
       the |spellsuggest()| function.  This is a comma-separated list of
       items:

       best		Internal method that works best for English.  Finds
       		changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
       		scoring to improve the ordering.

       double		Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
       		results.  The first method is "fast", the other method
       		computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
       		word.  That only works when the language specifies
       		sound folding.  Can be slow and doesn't always give
       		better results.

       fast		Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
       		character inserts/deletes/swaps.  Works well for
       		simple typing mistakes.

       {number}	The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|.
       		Not used for |spellsuggest()|.  The number of
       		suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'
       		minus two.

       timeout:{millisec}   Limit the time searching for suggestions to
       		{millisec} milliseconds.  Applies to the following
       		methods.  When omitted the limit is 5000.  When
       		negative there is no limit.

       file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
       		separated by a slash.  The first column contains the
       		bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
       		Example:
       			theribal/terrible ~
       		Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
       		top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
       		Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
       		comments.
       		The word in the second column must be correct,
       		otherwise it will not be used.  Add the word to an
       		".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling
       		mistake.
       		The file is used for all languages.

       expr:{expr}	Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
       		trouble with spaces.  Best is to call a function
       		without arguments, see |expr-option-function|.
       		|v:val| holds the badly spelled word.  The expression
       		must evaluate to a List of Lists, each with a
       		suggestion and a score.
       		Example:
       			[['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~
       		Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the
       		internal methods use.  A lower score is better.
       		This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
       		set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
       		Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
       		'verbose' option to a non-zero value.

       Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used.  The others may
       appear several times in any order.  Example: >vim
       	set sps=file:~/.config/nvim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
       <	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'spellsuggest',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('method(s) used to suggest spelling corrections'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sps',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
       one. |:split|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'splitbelow',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('new window from split is below the current one'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sb',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'spk',
     defaults = 'cursor',
     values = { 'cursor', 'screen', 'topline' },
     desc = [=[
       The value of this option determines the scroll behavior when opening,
       closing or resizing horizontal splits.

       Possible values are:
         cursor	Keep the same relative cursor position.
         screen	Keep the text on the same screen line.
         topline	Keep the topline the same.

       For the "screen" and "topline" values, the cursor position will be
       changed when necessary.  In this case, the jumplist will be populated
       with the previous cursor position.  For "screen", the text cannot
       always be kept on the same screen line when 'wrap' is enabled.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'splitkeep',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('determines scroll behavior for split windows'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_spk',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'spr',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
       current one. |:vsplit|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'splitright',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('new window is put right of the current one'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_spr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sol',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
       non-blank of the line.  When off the cursor is kept in the same column
       (if possible).  This applies to the commands:
       - CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", "gg"
       - "d", "<<", "==" and ">>" with a linewise operator
         (|operator-resulting-pos|)
       - "%" with a count
       - buffer changing commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.)
       - Ex commands that only have a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
       In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
       where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'startofline',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('commands move cursor to first non-blank in line'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_sol',
     vim = false,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'stc',
     cb = 'did_set_statuscolumn',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty, this option determines the content of the area to the
       side of a window, normally containing the fold, sign and number columns.
       The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.

       Some of the items from the 'statusline' format are different for
       'statuscolumn':

       %l	line number column for currently drawn line
       %s	sign column for currently drawn line
       %C	fold column for currently drawn line

       The 'statuscolumn' width follows that of the default columns and
       adapts to the 'numberwidth', 'signcolumn' and 'foldcolumn' option values
       (regardless of whether the sign and fold items are present).
       Additionally, the 'statuscolumn' grows with the size of the evaluated
       format string, up to a point (following the maximum size of the default
       fold, sign and number columns). Shrinking only happens when the number
       of lines in a buffer changes, or the 'statuscolumn' option is set.

       The |v:lnum|    variable holds the line number to be drawn.
       The |v:relnum|  variable holds the relative line number to be drawn.
       The |v:virtnum| variable is negative when drawing virtual lines, zero
       	      when drawing the actual buffer line, and positive when
       	      drawing the wrapped part of a buffer line.

       When using |v:relnum|, keep in mind that cursor movement by itself will
       not cause the 'statuscolumn' to update unless 'relativenumber' is set.

       NOTE: The %@ click execute function item is supported as well but the
       specified function will be the same for each row in the same column.
       It cannot be switched out through a dynamic 'statuscolumn' format, the
       handler should be written with this in mind.

       Examples: >vim
       	" Line number with bar separator and click handlers:
       	set statuscolumn=%@SignCb@%s%=%T%@NumCb@%l│%T

       	" Line numbers in hexadecimal for non wrapped part of lines:
       	let &stc='%=%{v:virtnum>0?"":printf("%x",v:lnum)} '

       	" Human readable line numbers with thousands separator:
       	let &stc='%{substitute(v:lnum,"\\d\\zs\\ze\\'
       		   . '%(\\d\\d\\d\\)\\+$",",","g")}'

       	" Both relative and absolute line numbers with different
       	" highlighting for odd and even relative numbers:
       	let &stc='%#NonText#%{&nu?v:lnum:""}' .
       	 '%=%{&rnu&&(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}' .
       	 '%#LineNr#%{&rnu&&!(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}'

       <	WARNING: this expression is evaluated for each screen line so defining
       an expensive expression can negatively affect render performance.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'statuscolumn',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('custom format for the status column'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'stl',
     cb = 'did_set_statusline',
     defaults = {
       if_true = table.concat({
         '%<',
         '%f %h%w%m%r ',
         '%=',
         "%{% &showcmdloc == 'statusline' ? '%-10.S ' : '' %}",
         "%{% exists('b:keymap_name') ? '<'..b:keymap_name..'> ' : '' %}",
         "%{% &busy > 0 ? '◐ ' : '' %}",
         "%{% luaeval('(package.loaded[''vim.diagnostic''] and #vim.diagnostic.count() ~= 0 and vim.diagnostic.status() .. '' '') or '''' ') %}",
         "%{% &ruler ? ( &rulerformat == '' ? '%-14.(%l,%c%V%) %P' : &rulerformat ) : '' %}",
       }),
       doc = 'is very long',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Sets the |status-line|.

       The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
       normal text.  Each status line item is of the form:
         %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
       All fields except the {item} are optional.  A single percent sign can
       be given as "%%".

       						*stl-%!*
       When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,
       evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >vim
       	set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
       <	The *g:statusline_winid* variable will be set to the |window-ID| of the
       window that the status line belongs to.
       The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
       Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
       current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
       context of the window that the statusline belongs to.

       When there is an error while evaluating the option it will be reset to
       its default value to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating
       would loop.  When the result contains unprintable characters the
       result is unpredictable.

       Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
       'laststatus' is 2 or 3) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.

       field	    meaning ~
       -	    Left justify the item.  The default is right justified
       	    when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
       0	    Leading zeroes in numeric items.  Overridden by "-".
       minwid	    Minimum width of the item, padding as set by "-" & "0".
       	    Value must be 50 or less.
       maxwid	    Maximum width of the item.  Truncation occurs with a "<"
       	    on the left for text items.  Numeric items will be
       	    shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by ">"number
       	    where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
       	    an exponential notation.
       item	    A one letter code as described below.

       Following is a description of the possible statusline items.  The
       second character in "item" is the type:
       	N for number
       	S for string
       	F for flags as described below
       	- not applicable

       item  meaning ~
       f S   Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current
             directory.
       F S   Full path to the file in the buffer.
       t S   File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
       m F   Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
       M F   Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
       r F   Readonly flag, text is "[RO]".
       R F   Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
       h F   Help buffer flag, text is "[help]".
       H F   Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
       w F   Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]".
       W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
       y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
       Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
       q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
       k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
             being used: "<keymap>"
       n N   Buffer number.
       b N   Value of character under cursor.
       B N   As above, in hexadecimal.
       o N   Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
             Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
       O N   As above, in hexadecimal.
       l N   Line number.
       L N   Number of lines in buffer.
       c N   Column number (byte index).
       v N   Virtual column number (screen column).
       V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.  Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
       p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
       P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
             percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length, unless
             translated.
       S S   'showcmd' content, see 'showcmdloc'.
       a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
             Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
       { NF  Evaluate expression between "%{" and "}" and substitute result.
             Note that there is no "%" before the closing "}".  The
             expression cannot contain a "}" character, call a function to
             work around that.  See |stl-%{| below.
       `{%` -  This is almost same as "{" except the result of the expression is
             re-evaluated as a statusline format string.  Thus if the
             return value of expr contains "%" items they will get expanded.
             The expression can contain the "}" character, the end of
             expression is denoted by "%}".
             For example: >vim
       	func! Stl_filename() abort
       	    return "%t"
       	endfunc
       <	        `stl=%{Stl_filename()}`   results in `"%t"`
               `stl=%{%Stl_filename()%}` results in `"Name of current file"`
       %} -  End of "{%" expression
       ( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
             alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
       ) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
       T N   For 'tabline': start of tab page N label.  Use %T or %X to end
             the label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button switches
             to the specified tab page, while clicking it with middle mouse
             button closes the specified tab page.
       X N   For 'tabline': start of close tab N label.  Use %X or %T to end
             the label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X.  Use %999X for a "close current
             tab" label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button closes
             the specified tab page.
       @ N   Start of execute function label. Use %X or %T to end the label,
             e.g.: %10@SwitchBuffer@foo.c%X.  Clicking this label runs the
             specified function: in the example when clicking once using left
             mouse button on "foo.c", a `SwitchBuffer(10, 1, 'l', '    ')`
             expression will be run.  The specified function receives the
             following arguments in order:
             1. minwid field value or zero if no N was specified
             2. number of mouse clicks to detect multiple clicks
             3. mouse button used: "l", "r" or "m" for left, right or middle
                button respectively; one should not rely on third argument
                being only "l", "r" or "m": any other non-empty string value
                that contains only ASCII lower case letters may be expected
                for other mouse buttons
             4. modifiers pressed: string which contains "s" if shift
                modifier was pressed, "c" for control, "a" for alt and "m"
                for meta; currently if modifier is not pressed string
                contains space instead, but one should not rely on presence
                of spaces or specific order of modifiers: use |stridx()| to
                test whether some modifier is present; string is guaranteed
                to contain only ASCII letters and spaces, one letter per
                modifier; "?" modifier may also be present, but its presence
                is a bug that denotes that new mouse button recognition was
                added without modifying code that reacts on mouse clicks on
                this label.
             Use |getmousepos()|.winid in the specified function to get the
             corresponding window id of the clicked item.
       \< -   Where to truncate line if too long.  Default is at the start.
             No width fields allowed.
       = -   Separation point between alignment sections.  Each section will
             be separated by an equal number of spaces.  With one %= what
             comes after it will be right-aligned.  With two %= there is a
             middle part, with white space left and right of it.
             No width fields allowed.
       # -   Set highlight group.  The name must follow and then a # again.
             Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname.  The same
             highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current
             windows.
       $ -   Same as `#`, except the `%$HLname$` group will inherit from
             preceding highlight attributes.
       * -   Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
             minwid field, e.g. %1*.  Restore normal highlight with %* or
             %0*.  The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be
             applied to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current
             windows.
             The number N must be between 1 and 9.  See |hl-User1..9|

       When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when
       that flag comes right after plaintext.  This will make a nice display
       when flags are used like in the examples below.

       When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are
       not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
       become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
       completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >vim
       	set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
       <	Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
       line is displayed.
       			*stl-%{* *g:actual_curbuf* *g:actual_curwin*
       While evaluating %{} the current buffer and current window will be set
       temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
       currently being drawn.  The expression will evaluate in this context.
       The variable "g:actual_curbuf" is set to the `bufnr()` number of the
       real current buffer and "g:actual_curwin" to the |window-ID| of the
       real current window.  These values are strings.

       The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
       a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
       evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.

       If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
       a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
       using `:redrawstatus`.

       A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
       Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
       described above.

       Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
       If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
       edit your vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right.

       Examples:
       Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >vim
         set statusline=%<%f\ %h%w%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
       <	Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >vim
         set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
       <	Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >vim
         set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
         hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
       <	Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >vim
         set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
       <	In the |:autocmd|'s: >vim
         let b:gzflag = 1
       <	And: >vim
         unlet b:gzflag
       <	And define this function: >vim
         function VarExists(var, val)
             if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
         endfunction
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'statusline',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('custom format for the status line'),
     tags = { 'E540', 'E542' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_stl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'su',
     defaults = '.bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
       match a wildcard.  See |suffixes|.  Commas can be used to separate the
       suffixes.  Spaces after the comma are ignored.  A dot is also seen as
       the start of a suffix.  To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
       separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
       including spaces and backslashes).
       See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
       The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
       suffixes from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
       uses another default.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'suffixes',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('suffixes that are ignored with multiple match'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_su',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'sua',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Comma-separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
       file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands.  Example: >vim
       	set suffixesadd=.java
       <
     ]=],
     full_name = 'suffixesadd',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('suffixes added when searching for a file'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_sua',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'swf',
     cb = 'did_set_swapfile',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Use a swapfile for the buffer.  This option can be reset when a
       swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer.  For example, with
       confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
       Careful: All text will be in memory:
       	- Don't use this for big files.
       	- Recovery will be impossible!
       A swapfile will only be present when 'updatecount' is non-zero and
       'swapfile' is set.
       When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
       immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
       non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
       Also see |swap-file|.
       If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,
       use the |:noswapfile| modifier.
       See 'directory' for where the swap file is created.

       This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
       specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'swapfile',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('whether to use a swapfile for a buffer'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_swf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'swb',
     defaults = 'uselast',
     values = { 'useopen', 'usetab', 'split', 'newtab', 'vsplit', 'uselast' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
       This option is checked, when
       - jumping to errors with the |quickfix| commands (|:cc|, |:cn|, |:cp|,
         etc.).
       - jumping to a tag using the |:stag| command.
       - opening a file using the |CTRL-W_f| or |CTRL-W_F| command.
       - jumping to a buffer using a buffer split command (e.g.  |:sbuffer|,
         |:sbnext|, or |:sbrewind|).
       Possible values (comma-separated list):
          useopen	If included, jump to the first open window in the
       		current tab page that contains the specified buffer
       		(if there is one).  Otherwise: Do not examine other
       		windows.
          usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
       		pages.
          split	If included, split the current window before loading
       		a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
       		Otherwise: do not split, use current window (when used
       		in the quickfix window: the previously used window or
       		split if there is no other window).
          vsplit	Just like "split" but split vertically.
          newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
       		"split" when both are present.
          uselast	If included, jump to the previously used window when
       		jumping to errors with |quickfix| commands.
       If a window has 'winfixbuf' enabled, 'switchbuf' is currently not
       applied to the split window.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'switchbuf',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('sets behavior when switching to another buffer'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_swb',
     flags_varname = 'swb_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'smc',
     defaults = 3000,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum column in which to search for syntax items.  In long lines the
       text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
       be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
       This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
       long line.
       Set to zero to remove the limit.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'synmaxcol',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum column to find syntax items'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_smc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'syn',
     cb = 'did_set_filetype_or_syntax',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
       syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
       Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
       b:current_syntax variable does).
       This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
       not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file: >c
       	/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
       <	When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
       names.  Example: >c
       	/* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */
       <	This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.
       Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,
       otherwise it will be skipped.  More than one dot may appear.
       To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >vim
       	set syntax=OFF
       <	To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
       'filetype' option: >vim
       	set syntax=ON
       <	What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
       Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
       This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
       'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
       Only alphanumeric characters, '.', '-' and '_' can be used.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'syntax',
     noglob = true,
     normal_fname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('syntax to be loaded for current buffer'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_syn',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tcl',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'left', 'uselast' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option controls the behavior when closing tab pages (e.g., using
       |:tabclose|).  When empty Vim goes to the next (right) tab page.

       Possible values (comma-separated list):
          left		If included, go to the previous tab page instead of
       		the next one.
          uselast	If included, go to the previously used tab page if
       		possible.  This option takes precedence over the
       		others.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tabclose',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('which tab page to focus when closing a tab'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tcl',
     flags_varname = 'tcl_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tal',
     cb = 'did_set_tabline',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty, this option determines the content of the tab pages
       line at the top of the Vim window.  When empty Vim will use a default
       tab pages line.  See |setting-tabline| for more info.

       The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'
       option and only when there is no GUI tab line.  When 'e' is in
       'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used
       instead.  Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.

       The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'.  You can use
       |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out
       the text to be displayed.  Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for
       the second one, etc.  Use "%X" items for closing labels.

       When changing something that is used in 'tabline' that does not
       trigger it to be updated, use |:redrawtabline|.
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others
       are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tabline',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'tabline' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('custom format for the console tab pages line'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tal',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tpm',
     defaults = 50,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
       argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tabpagemax',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum number of tab pages for |-p| and "tab all"'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_tpm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ts',
     cb = 'did_set_shiftwidth_tabstop',
     defaults = 8,
     desc = [=[
       Defines the column multiple used to display the Horizontal Tab
       character (ASCII 9); a Horizontal Tab always advances to the next tab
       stop.
       The value must be at least 1 and at most 9999.
       If 'vartabstop' is set, this option is ignored.
       Leave it at 8 unless you have a strong reason (see usr |30.5|).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tabstop',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ts',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tbs',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
       use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file.  Binary
       searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
       will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
       Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
       they are not sorted.  Only when this is not the case does the
       'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.

       When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
       files.  In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
       certain files, or retry all files with a linear search.  When
       'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.

       Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
       at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
          !_TAG_FILE_SORTED	0	/some comment/
       <	[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]

       When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
       files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used
       instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
       Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
       be found in the retry.

       If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
       linear search can be avoided when case is ignored.  Use a value of '2'
       in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be case-fold
       sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command:
       "sort -f -o tags tags".  For Universal ctags and Exuberant ctags
       version 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be
       used for this as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for
       this to work.

       By default, tag searches are case-sensitive.  Case is ignored when
       'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
       "ignore".
       Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or
       'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase
       characters.

       When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
       exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
       files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
       When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
       ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
       must be included in the tags file.
       This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
       command-line completion and ":help").
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tagbsearch',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('use binary searching in tags files'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_tbs',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tc',
     cb = 'did_set_tagcase',
     defaults = 'followic',
     values = { 'followic', 'ignore', 'match', 'followscs', 'smart' },
     flags = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags
       file:
          followic	Follow the 'ignorecase' option
          followscs    Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options
          ignore	Ignore case
          match	Match case
          smart	Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tagcase',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('how to handle case when searching in tags files'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tc',
     flags_varname = 'tc_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tfu',
     cb = 'did_set_tagfunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies a function to be used to perform tag searches
       (including |taglist()|).
       The function gets the tag pattern and should return a List of matching
       tags.  See |tag-function| for an explanation of how to write the
       function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
       |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for more
       information.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tagfunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('function used to perform tag searches'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tfu',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tl',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'taglength',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('number of significant characters for a tag'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_tl',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tr',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that
       tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tagrelative',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('file names in tag file are relative'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_tr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tag',
     defaults = './tags;,tags',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas.  To
       include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with backslashes
       (see |option-backslash| about including spaces/commas and backslashes).
       When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
       of the current file.  But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
       'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
       |tags-option|.
       "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
       a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will
       find all files named "tags" below "/lib".  The filename itself cannot
       contain wildcards, it is used as-is.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find
       files called "tags?".
       The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
       actually used.
       The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
       file names from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
       uses another default.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'tags',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of file names used by the tag command'),
     tags = { 'E433' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tgst',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When on, the |tagstack| is used normally.  When off, a ":tag" or
       ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
       tagstack.  A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
       any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
       tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
       Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
       mapping which should not change the tagstack.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tagstack',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('push tags onto the tag stack'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_tgst',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tbidi',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
       by Unicode).  The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
       that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
       Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
       'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
       Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
       'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
       For further details see |l10n-arabic.txt|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'termbidi',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('terminal takes care of bi-directionality'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_tbidi',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tenc',
     defaults = '',
     full_name = 'termencoding',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Terminal encoding'),
     type = 'string',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tgc',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Enables 24-bit RGB color in the |TUI|.  Uses "gui" |:highlight|
       attributes instead of "cterm" attributes. |guifg|
       Requires an ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal.

       Nvim will automatically attempt to determine if the host terminal
       supports 24-bit color and will enable this option if it does
       (unless explicitly disabled by the user).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'termguicolors',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Terminal true color support'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_tgc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tpf',
     defaults = 'BS,HT,ESC,DEL',
     values = { 'BS', 'HT', 'FF', 'ESC', 'DEL', 'C0', 'C1' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of options for specifying control characters
       to be removed from the text pasted into the terminal window. The
       supported values are:

          BS	    Backspace

          HT	    TAB

          FF	    Form feed

          ESC	    Escape

          DEL	    DEL

          C0	    Other control characters, excluding Line feed and
       	    Carriage return < ' '

          C1	    Control characters 0x80...0x9F
     ]=],
     full_name = 'termpastefilter',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tpf',
     flags_varname = 'tpf_flags',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       If the host terminal supports it, buffer all screen updates
       made during a redraw cycle so that each screen is displayed in
       the terminal all at once. This can prevent tearing or flickering
       when the terminal updates faster than Nvim can redraw.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'termsync',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('synchronize redraw output with the host terminal'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_termsync',
   },
   {
     defaults = false,
     full_name = 'terse',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tw',
     cb = 'did_set_textwidth',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
       broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
       this.
       When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
       'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
       When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'textwidth',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum width of text that is being inserted'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_tw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tsr',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
       for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.  See
       |compl-thesaurus|.

       This option is not used if 'thesaurusfunc' is set, either for the
       buffer or globally.

       To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
       after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
       name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.  The use of
       |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories
       from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version uses
       another default.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'thesaurus',
     list = 'onecomma',
     normal_dname_chars = true,
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of thesaurus files for keyword completion'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tsr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tsrfu',
     cb = 'did_set_thesaurusfunc',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       This option specifies a function to be used for thesaurus completion
       with CTRL-X CTRL-T.  |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T| See |compl-thesaurusfunc|.
       The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
       See |option-value-function| for more information.

       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'thesaurusfunc',
     func = true,
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('function used for thesaurus completion'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_tsrfu',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'top',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'tildeop',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('tilde command "~" behaves like an operator'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_to',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'to',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option and 'timeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
       mapped key sequence has been received. For example, if <c-f> is
       pressed and 'timeout' is set, Nvim will wait 'timeoutlen' milliseconds
       for any key that can follow <c-f> in a mapping.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'timeout',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('time out on mappings and key codes'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_timeout',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tm',
     defaults = 1000,
     desc = [=[
       Time in milliseconds to wait for a mapped sequence to complete.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'timeoutlen',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('time out time in milliseconds'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_tm',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_title_icon',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
       'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
       	filename [+=-] (path) - Nvim
       Where:
       	filename	the name of the file being edited
       	-		indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
       	+		indicates the file was modified
       	=		indicates the file is read-only
       	=+		indicates the file is read-only and modified
       	(path)		is the path of the file being edited
       	- Nvim		the server name |v:servername| or "Nvim"
     ]=],
     full_name = 'title',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('set the title of the window'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_title',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_titlelen',
     defaults = 85,
     desc = [=[
       Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
       title.  When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
       shown.  A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
       Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window.  But
       it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
       available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
       bar.  When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used.  Otherwise,
       values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
       'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'titlelen',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("of 'columns' used for window title"),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_titlelen',
   },
   {
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       If not empty, this option will be used to set the window title when
       exiting.  Only if 'title' is enabled.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'titleold',
     no_mkrc = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('title, restored when exiting'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_titleold',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_titlestring',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
       window.  This happens only when the 'title' option is on.

       When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
       expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  If it contains
       an invalid '%' format, the value is used as-is and no error or warning
       will be given when the value is set.

       The default behaviour is equivalent to: >vim
           set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ \(%{expand(\"%:~:h\")}\)%)%a\ -\ Nvim
       <
       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

       Example: >vim
           auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() .. "/" .. expand("%:p")
           set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
       <	The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
       of the available space.
       Some people prefer to have the file name first: >vim
           set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
       <	Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
       without the file name.  The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
       separating space only when needed.
       NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
       to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'titlestring',
     modelineexpr = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('to use for the Vim window title'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_titlestring',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option and 'ttimeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
       key code sequence has been received by the |TUI|.

       For example if <Esc> (the \x1b byte) is received and 'ttimeout' is
       set, Nvim waits 'ttimeoutlen' milliseconds for the terminal to
       complete a key code sequence. If no input arrives before the timeout,
       a single <Esc> is assumed. Many TUI cursor key codes start with <Esc>.

       On very slow systems this may fail, causing cursor keys not to work
       sometimes.  If you discover this problem you can ":set ttimeoutlen=9999".
       Nvim will wait for the next character to arrive after an <Esc>.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'ttimeout',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('out on mappings'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ttimeout',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ttm',
     defaults = 50,
     desc = [=[
       Time in milliseconds to wait for a key code sequence to complete. Also
       used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G when part of a command has
       been typed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'ttimeoutlen',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('time out time for key codes in milliseconds'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ttm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'tf',
     defaults = true,
     full_name = 'ttyfast',
     no_mkrc = true,
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
     type = 'boolean',
     immutable = true,
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'udir',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.
       See 'backupdir' for details of the format.
       "." means using the directory of the file.  The undo file name for
       "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".
       For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited
       file, with path separators replaced with "%".
       When writing: The first directory that exists is used.  "." always
       works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.  If none of
       the directories exist Nvim will attempt to create the last directory in
       the list.
       When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file.  The first
       undo file that exists is used.  When it cannot be read an error is
       given, no further entry is used.
       See |undo-persistence|.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.

       Note that unlike 'directory' and 'backupdir', 'undodir' always acts as
       though the trailing slashes are present (see 'backupdir' for what this
       means).
     ]=],
     expand = 'nodefault',
     full_name = 'undodir',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('where to store undo files'),
     tags = { 'E5003' },
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_udir',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'udf',
     cb = 'did_set_undofile',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when
       writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same
       file on buffer read.
       The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.
       For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
       The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
       before a reload to be saved for undo.
       When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'undofile',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('save undo information in a file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_udf',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ul',
     cb = 'did_set_undolevels',
     defaults = 1000,
     desc = [=[
       Maximum number of changes that can be undone.  Since undo information
       is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used.
       Nevertheless, a single change can already use a large amount of
       memory.  Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u"
       undoes itself: >vim
       	set ul=0
       <	But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
       'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
       Also see |undo-two-ways|.
       Set to -1 for no undo at all.  You might want to do this only for the
       current buffer: >vim
       	setlocal ul=-1
       <	This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.

       The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used.

       Also see |clear-undo|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'undolevels',
     scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('maximum number of changes that can be undone'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ul',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ur',
     defaults = 10000,
     desc = [=[
       Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
       ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
       Vim. |FileChangedShell|
       The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number
       of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
       Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.

       When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.

       Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory.  Set
       this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'undoreload',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('max nr of lines to save for undo on a buffer reload'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ur',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'uc',
     cb = 'did_set_updatecount',
     defaults = 200,
     desc = [=[
       After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
       disk.  When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
       recovery |crash-recovery|).  'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
       Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|.  When editing in readonly
       mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
       The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with 'swapfile'.
       When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
       created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set.  When 'updatecount'
       is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
       This option has no meaning in buffers where 'buftype' is "nofile" or
       "nowrite".
     ]=],
     full_name = 'updatecount',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('after this many characters flush swap file'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_uc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ut',
     defaults = 4000,
     desc = [=[
       If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
       written to disk (see |crash-recovery|).  Also used for the
       |CursorHold| autocommand event.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'updatetime',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('after this many milliseconds flush swap file'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_ut',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vsts',
     cb = 'did_set_varsofttabstop',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Defines variable-width soft tab stops.  The value is a comma-separated
       list of widths in columns.  Each width defines the number of columns
       before the next soft tab stop.  The last value repeats indefinitely.

       For example, when editing assembly language files where statements
       start in the 9th column and comments in the 41st, it may be useful
       to use the following: >vim
       	set varsofttabstop=8,32,8
       <	This sets soft tab stops at column 8, then at column 40 (8 + 32), and
       every 8 columns thereafter.

       Note: this setting overrides 'softtabstop'.
       See section |30.5| of the user manual for detailed explanations on how
       Vim works with tabs and spaces.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'varsofttabstop',
     list = 'comma',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_vsts',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vts',
     cb = 'did_set_vartabstop',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Defines variable-width tab stops.  The value is a comma-separated list
       of widths in columns.  Each width defines the number of columns before
       the next tab stop; the last value repeats indefinitely.

       For example: >
       	:set vartabstop=4,8
       <	This places the first tab stop 4 columns from the start of the line
       and each subsequent tab stop 8 columns apart.

       Note: this setting overrides 'tabstop'.
       On UNIX, it is recommended to keep the default tabstop value of 8.
       Consider setting 'varsofttabstop' instead.
       See section |30.5| of the user manual for detailed explanations on how
       Vim works with tabs and spaces.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'vartabstop',
     list = 'comma',
     redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> in file uses'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_vts',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vbs',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Sets the verbosity level.  Also set by |-V| and |:verbose|.

       Tracing of assignments to options, mappings, etc. in Lua scripts is
       enabled at level 1; Lua scripts are not traced when 'verbose' is 0,
       for performance.

       If greater than or equal to a given level, Nvim produces the following
       messages:

       Level   Messages ~
       ----------------------------------------------------------------------
       1	Enables Lua tracing (see above). Does not produce messages.
       2	When a file is ":source"'ed, or |shada| file is read or written.
       3	UI info, terminal capabilities.
       4	Shell commands.
       5	Every searched tags file and include file.
       8	Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
       9	Executed autocommands.
       11	Finding items in a path.
       12	Vimscript function calls.
       13	When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
       14	Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
       15	Ex commands from a script (truncated at 200 characters).
       16	Ex commands.

       If 'verbosefile' is set then the verbose messages are not displayed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'verbose',
     redraw = { 'ui_option' },
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('give informative messages'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_verbose',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vfile',
     cb = 'did_set_verbosefile',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
       When the file exists messages are appended.
       Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
       empty.  Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.
       Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
       The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
       displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = true,
     full_name = 'verbosefile',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('file to write messages in'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_vfile',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vdir',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
       Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
       security reasons.
     ]=],
     expand = 'nodefault',
     full_name = 'viewdir',
     scope = { 'global' },
     secure = true,
     short_desc = N_('directory where to store files with :mkview'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_vdir',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vop',
     cb = 'did_set_str_generic',
     defaults = 'folds,cursor,curdir',
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma-separated
       list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring something:
          word		save and restore ~
          cursor	cursor position in file and in window
          curdir	local current directory, if set with |:lcd|
          folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
       		fold options
          options	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
       		global values for local options)
          localoptions same as "options"
          slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
          unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_str_generic',
     full_name = 'viewoptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('specifies what to save for :mkview'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_vop',
     flags_varname = 'vop_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 've',
     cb = 'did_set_virtualedit',
     defaults = '',
     values = { 'block', 'insert', 'all', 'onemore', 'none', 'NONE' },
     flags = {
       Block = 5,
       Insert = 6,
       All = 4,
       Onemore = 8,
       None = 16,
       NoneU = 32,
     },
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A comma-separated list of these words:
           block	Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
           insert	Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
           all		Allow virtual editing in all modes.
           onemore	Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line
           none	When used as the local value, do not allow virtual
       		editing even when the global value is set.  When used
       		as the global value, "none" is the same as "".
           NONE	Alternative spelling of "none".

       Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
       no actual character.  This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end
       of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
       editing a table.
       "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just
       after the last character of the line.  This makes some commands more
       consistent.  Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line
       if the line was empty.  But it is far from Vi compatible.  It may also
       break some plugins or Vim scripts.  For example because |l| can move
       the cursor after the last character.  Use with care!
       Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not
       past it.  This may actually move the cursor to the left!
       The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line.
       It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will
       not get a warning for it.
       When combined with other words, "none" is ignored.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'virtualedit',
     list = 'onecomma',
     redraw = { 'curswant' },
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('when to use virtual editing'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ve',
     flags_varname = 've_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'vb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Use visual bell instead of beeping.  Also see 'errorbells'.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'visualbell',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('use visual bell instead of beeping'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_vb',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
       has been changed.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'warn',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('for shell command when buffer was changed'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_warn',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ww',
     cb = 'did_set_whichwrap',
     defaults = 'b,s',
     desc = [=[
       Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
       previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
       the line.  Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
       	char   key	  mode	~
       	 b    <BS>	 Normal and Visual
       	 s    <Space>	 Normal and Visual
       	 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
       	 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
       	 <    <Left>	 Normal and Visual
       	 >    <Right>	 Normal and Visual
       	 ~    "~"	 Normal
       	 [    <Left>	 Insert and Replace
       	 ]    <Right>	 Insert and Replace
       For example: >vim
       	set ww=<,>,[,]
       <	allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
       When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
       operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character.  This makes "3h"
       different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line.  This
       is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
       "dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
       ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
       cursor.
       When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a
       line (not an empty line) then it will not move to the next line.  This
       makes "dl", "cl", "yl" etc. work normally.
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_whichwrap',
     full_name = 'whichwrap',
     list = 'flagscomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('allow specified keys to cross line boundaries'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_ww',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wc',
     cb = 'did_set_wildchar',
     defaults = {
       if_true = macros('TAB', 'number'),
       doc = '<Tab>',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
       command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
       More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
       The character is not recognized when used inside a macro.  See
       'wildcharm' for that.
       Some keys will not work, such as CTRL-C, <CR> and Enter.
       <Esc> can be used, but hitting it twice in a row will still exit
       command-line as a failsafe measure.
       Although 'wc' is a number option, it can be specified as a number, a
       single character, a |key-notation| (e.g. <Up>, <C-F>) or a letter
       preceded with a caret (e.g. `^F` is CTRL-F): >vim
       	:set wc=27
       	:set wc=X
       	:set wc=^I
       	set wc=<Tab>
       <	'wildchar' also enables completion in search pattern contexts such as
       |/|, |?|, |:s|, |:g|, |:v|, and |:vim|.  To insert a literal <Tab>
       instead of triggering completion, type <C-V><Tab> or "\t".
       See also 'wildoptions' and |wildtrigger()|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildchar',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('command-line character for wildcard expansion'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wc',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wcm',
     cb = 'did_set_wildchar',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
       recognized when used inside a macro.  You can find "spare"
       command-line keys suitable for this option by looking at
       |ex-edit-index|.  Normally you'll never actually type 'wildcharm',
       just use it in mappings that automatically invoke completion mode,
       e.g.: >vim
       	set wcm=<C-Z>
       	cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
       <	Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildcharm',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("like 'wildchar' but also works when mapped"),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wcm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wig',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
       patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
       directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
       |globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
       The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
       Also see 'suffixes'.
       Example: >vim
       	set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
       <	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
       a pattern from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
       uses another default.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildignore',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('files matching these patterns are not completed'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_wig',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wic',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.
       Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set.
       Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which
       happens when there are special characters.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildignorecase',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('ignore case when completing file names'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_wic',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wmnu',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
       mode.  On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
       the possible matches are shown.
       When 'wildoptions' contains "pum", then the completion matches are
       shown in a popup menu.  Otherwise they are displayed just above the
       command line, with the first match highlighted (overwriting the status
       line, if there is one).
       Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
       CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
       'wildmode' must specify "full": "longest" and "list" do not start
       'wildmenu' mode. You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|.
       The menu is cancelled when a key is hit that is not used for selecting
       a completion.

       While the menu is active these keys have special meanings:
       CTRL-P		- go to the previous entry
       CTRL-N		- go to the next entry
       <Left> <Right>	- select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
       <PageUp>	- select a match several entries back
       <PageDown>	- select a match several entries further
       <Up>		- in filename/menu name completion: move up into
       		  parent directory or parent menu.
       <Down>		- in filename/menu name completion: move into a
       		  subdirectory or submenu.
       <CR>		- in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
       		  dot: move into a submenu.
       CTRL-E		- end completion, go back to what was there before
       		  selecting a match.
       CTRL-Y		- accept the currently selected match and stop
       		  completion.

       If you want <Left> and <Right> to move the cursor instead of selecting
       a different match, use this: >vim
       	cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
       	cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
       <
       |hl-WildMenu| highlights the current match.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildmenu',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('use menu for command line completion'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_wmnu',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wim',
     cb = 'did_set_wildmode',
     defaults = 'full',
     -- Keep this in sync with check_opt_wim().
     values = { 'full', 'longest', 'list', 'lastused', 'noselect' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = false,
     desc = [=[
       Completion mode used for the character specified with 'wildchar'.
       This option is a comma-separated list of up to four parts,
       corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth presses of
       'wildchar'.  Each part is a colon-separated list of completion
       behaviors, which are applied simultaneously during that phase.

       The possible behavior values are:
       ""		Only complete (insert) the first match.  No further
       		matches are cycled or listed.
       "full"		Complete the next full match.  Cycles through all
       		matches, returning to the original input after the
       		last match.  If 'wildmenu' is enabled, it will be
       		shown.
       "longest"	Complete to the longest common substring.  If this
       		doesn't extend the input, the next 'wildmode' part is
       		used.
       "list"		If multiple matches are found, list all of them.
       "lastused"	When completing buffer names, sort them by most
       		recently used (excluding the current buffer).  Only
       		applies to buffer name completion.
       "noselect"	If 'wildmenu' is enabled, show the menu but do not
       		preselect the first item.
       If only one match exists, it is completed fully, unless "noselect" is
       specified.

       Some useful combinations of colon-separated values:
       "longest:full"		Start with the longest common string and show
       			'wildmenu' (if enabled).  Does not cycle
       			through full matches.
       "list:full"		List all matches and complete first match.
       "list:longest"		List all matches and complete till the longest
       			common prefix.
       "list:lastused"		List all matches.  When completing buffers,
       			sort them by most recently used (excluding the
       			current buffer).
       "noselect:lastused"	Do not preselect the first item in 'wildmenu'
       			if it is active.  When completing buffers,
       			sort them by most recently used (excluding the
       			current buffer).

       Examples: >vim
       	set wildmode=full
       <	Complete full match on every press (default behavior) >vim
       	set wildmode=longest,full
       <	First press: longest common substring
       Second press: cycle through full matches >vim
       	set wildmode=list:full
       <	First press: list all matches and complete the first one >vim
       	set wildmode=list,full
       <	First press: list matches only
       Second press: complete full matches >vim
       	set wildmode=longest,list
       <	First press: longest common substring
       Second press: list all matches >vim
       	set wildmode=noselect:full
       <	First press: show 'wildmenu' without completing or selecting
       Second press: cycle full matches >vim
       	set wildmode=noselect:lastused,full
       <	Same as above, but buffer matches are sorted by time last used
       More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildmode',
     list = 'onecommacolon',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_("mode for 'wildchar' command-line expansion"),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_wim',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wop',
     defaults = 'pum,tagfile',
     values = { 'fuzzy', 'tagfile', 'pum', 'exacttext' },
     flags = true,
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       A list of words that change how |cmdline-completion| is done.
       The following values are supported:
         exacttext	When this flag is present, search pattern completion
       		(e.g., in |/|, |?|, |:s|, |:g|, |:v|, and |:vim|)
       		shows exact buffer text as menu items, without
       		preserving regex artifacts like position
       		anchors (e.g., |/\\<|).  This provides more intuitive
       		menu items that match the actual buffer text.
       		However, searches may be less accurate since the
       		pattern is not preserved exactly.
       		By default, Vim preserves the typed pattern (with
       		anchors) and appends the matched word.  This preserves
       		search correctness, especially when using regular
       		expressions or with 'smartcase' enabled.  However, the
       		case of the appended matched word may not exactly
       		match the case of the word in the buffer.
         fuzzy		Use |fuzzy-matching| to find completion matches.  When
       		this value is specified, wildcard expansion will not
       		be used for completion.  The matches will be sorted by
       		the "best match" rather than alphabetically sorted.
       		This will find more matches than the wildcard
       		expansion.  Currently fuzzy matching based completion
       		is not supported for file and directory names and
       		instead wildcard expansion is used.
         pum		Display the completion matches using the popup menu in
       		the same style as the |ins-completion-menu|.
         tagfile	When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
       		tag and the file of the tag is listed.	Only one match
       		is displayed per line.  Often used tag kinds are:
       			d	#define
       			f	function

       This option does not apply to |ins-completion|.  See 'completeopt' for
       that.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wildoptions',
     list = 'onecomma',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('specifies how command line completion is done'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_wop',
     flags_varname = 'wop_flags',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wak',
     defaults = 'menu',
     values = { 'yes', 'menu', 'no' },
     desc = [=[
       		only used in Win32
       Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
       key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
       menu.  This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
       entering special characters.  This option tells what to do:
         no	Don't use ALT keys for menus.  ALT key combinations can be
       	mapped, but there is no automatic handling.
         yes	ALT key handling is done by the windowing system.  ALT key
       	combinations cannot be mapped.
         menu	Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
       	shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system.  Other
       	keys can be mapped.
       If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
       key is never used for the menu.
       This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winaltkeys',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('when the windows system handles ALT keys'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_wak',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wbr',
     cb = 'did_set_winbar',
     defaults = '',
     desc = [=[
       When non-empty, this option enables the window bar and determines its
       contents. The window bar is a bar that's shown at the top of every
       window with it enabled. The value of 'winbar' is evaluated like with
       'statusline'.

       When changing something that is used in 'winbar' that does not trigger
       it to be updated, use |:redrawstatus|.

       Floating windows do not use the global value of 'winbar'. The
       window-local value of 'winbar' must be set for a floating window to
       have a window bar.

       This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winbar',
     modelineexpr = true,
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'global', 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('custom format for the window bar'),
     type = 'string',
     varname = 'p_wbr',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'winbl',
     cb = 'did_set_winblend',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Enables pseudo-transparency for a floating window. Valid values are in
       the range of 0 for fully opaque window (disabled) to 100 for fully
       transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.

       UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winblend',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('Controls transparency level for floating windows'),
     type = 'number',
   },
   {
     full_name = 'winborder',
     scope = { 'global' },
     cb = 'did_set_winborder',
     defaults = { if_true = '' },
     values = { '', 'double', 'single', 'shadow', 'rounded', 'solid', 'bold', 'none' },
     desc = [=[
       Defines the default border style of floating windows. The default value
       is empty, which is equivalent to "none". Valid values include:
       - "bold": Bold line box.
       - "double": Double-line box.
       - "none": No border.
       - "rounded": Like "single", but with rounded corners ("╭" etc.).
       - "shadow": Drop shadow effect, by blending with the background.
       - "single": Single-line box.
       - "solid": Adds padding by a single whitespace cell.
       - custom: comma-separated list of exactly 8 characters in clockwise
         order starting from topleft. Example: >lua
            vim.o.winborder='+,-,+,|,+,-,+,|'
       <
     ]=],
     short_desc = N_('border of floating window'),
     type = 'string',
     list = 'onecomma',
     varname = 'p_winborder',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wi',
     cb = 'did_set_window',
     defaults = {
       if_true = 0,
       doc = 'screen height - 1',
     },
     desc = [=[
       Window height used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one
       window and the value is smaller than 'lines' minus one.  The screen
       will scroll 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
       When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
       in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
       When resizing the Vim window, and the value is smaller than 1 or more
       than or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
       Note: Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, use
       'lines' for that.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'window',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('nr of lines to scroll for CTRL-F and CTRL-B'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_window',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wfb',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       If enabled, the window and the buffer it is displaying are paired.
       For example, attempting to change the buffer with |:edit| will fail.
       Other commands which change a window's buffer such as |:cnext| will
       also skip any window with 'winfixbuf' enabled.  However if an Ex
       command has a "!" modifier, it can force switching buffers.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winfixbuf',
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('pin a window to a specific buffer'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wfh',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
       'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.  Set by default for the
       |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|.
       The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winfixheight',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('keep window height when opening/closing windows'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wfw',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
       'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.
       The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winfixwidth',
     redraw = { 'statuslines' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('keep window width when opening/closing windows'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wh',
     cb = 'did_set_winheight',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
       minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.  If the
       focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the
       cost of the height of other windows.
       Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing.
       Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen.
       Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high.  This has the drawback
       that ":all" will create only two windows.  To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4"
       to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done,
       using the |VimEnter| event: >vim
       	au VimEnter * set winheight=999
       <	Minimum value is 1.
       The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the
       height of the current window.
       'winheight' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminheight' to set
       the minimal height for other windows.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winheight',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for the current window'),
     tags = { 'E591' },
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'winhl',
     cb = 'did_set_winhighlight',
     defaults = '',
     deny_duplicates = true,
     desc = [=[
       Window-local highlights.  Comma-delimited list of highlight
       |group-name| pairs "{hl-from}:{hl-to},..." where each {hl-from} is
       a |highlight-groups| item to be overridden by {hl-to} group in
       the window.

       Note: highlight namespaces take precedence over 'winhighlight'.
       See |nvim_win_set_hl_ns()| and |nvim_set_hl()|.

       Highlights of vertical separators are determined by the window to the
       left of the separator.  The 'tabline' highlight of a tabpage is
       decided by the last-focused window of the tabpage.  Highlights of
       the popupmenu are determined by the current window.  Highlights in the
       message area cannot be overridden.

       Example: show a different color for non-current windows: >vim
       	set winhighlight=Normal:MyNormal,NormalNC:MyNormalNC
       <
     ]=],
     expand_cb = 'expand_set_winhighlight',
     full_name = 'winhighlight',
     list = 'onecommacolon',
     redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('Setup window-local highlights'),
     type = 'string',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wmh',
     cb = 'did_set_winminheight',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
       This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
       When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
       status bar) if necessary.  They will return to at least one line when
       they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
       Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
       This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
       large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
       windows.  A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winminheight',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for any window'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wmh',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wmw',
     cb = 'did_set_winminwidth',
     defaults = 1,
     desc = [=[
       The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
       This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
       When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
       a vertical separator) if necessary.  They will return to at least one
       line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
       to go.)
       Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
       This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
       large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
       windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winminwidth',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimal number of columns for any window'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wmw',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wiw',
     cb = 'did_set_winwidth',
     defaults = 20,
     desc = [=[
       Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
       minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If
       the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
       the width of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
       always fill the screen.  Set it to a small number for normal editing.
       The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
       width of the current window.
       'winwidth' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminwidth' to set
       the minimal width for other windows.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'winwidth',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('minimal number of columns for current window'),
     tags = { 'E592' },
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wiw',
   },
   {
     cb = 'did_set_wrap',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       This option changes how text is displayed.  It doesn't change the text
       in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
       When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
       displaying continues on the next line.  When off lines will not wrap
       and only part of long lines will be displayed.  When the cursor is
       moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
       horizontally.
       The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary.  See
       'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
       To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >vim
       	set sidescroll=5
       	set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
       <	See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
       This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
       on.
       If 'nowrap' was set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, '>' is used
       as the |lcs-extends| character regardless of the value of the 'list'
       and 'listchars' options.  This is to prevent malicious code outside
       the viewport from going unnoticed.  Use `:setlocal nowrap` manually
       afterwards to disable this behavior.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wrap',
     redraw = { 'current_window' },
     scope = { 'win' },
     short_desc = N_('lines wrap and continue on the next line'),
     type = 'boolean',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wm',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
       starts.  When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
       and inserting continues on the next line.
       Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
       the text width to be further reduced.
       When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
       See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wrapmargin',
     scope = { 'buf' },
     short_desc = N_('chars from the right where wrapping starts'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wm',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'ws',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Searches wrap around the end of the file.  Also applies to |]s| and
       |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'wrapscan',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('searches wrap around the end of the file'),
     tags = { 'E384', 'E385' },
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_ws',
   },
   {
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Allows writing files.  When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
       Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
       still allowed.  Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
       argument.  Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
       writing a temporary file.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'write',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('to a file is allowed'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_write',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wa',
     defaults = false,
     desc = [=[
       Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
     ]=],
     full_name = 'writeany',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('write to file with no need for "!" override'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_wa',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wb',
     defaults = true,
     desc = [=[
       Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
       the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
       also on.
       WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
       your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
       lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
       this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
       fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
       See |backup-table| for another explanation.
       When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
       Depending on 'backupcopy' the backup is a new file or the original
       file renamed (and a new file is written).
     ]=],
     full_name = 'writebackup',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('make a backup before overwriting a file'),
     type = 'boolean',
     varname = 'p_wb',
   },
   {
     abbreviation = 'wd',
     defaults = 0,
     desc = [=[
       Only takes effect together with 'redrawdebug'.
       The number of milliseconds to wait after each line or each flush
     ]=],
     full_name = 'writedelay',
     scope = { 'global' },
     short_desc = N_('delay this many msec for each char (for debug)'),
     type = 'number',
     varname = 'p_wd',
   },
 },
}

--- @param o vim.option_meta
local function preprocess(o)
 if o.values then
   o.cb = o.cb or 'did_set_str_generic'
   o.expand_cb = o.expand_cb or 'expand_set_str_generic'
 end

 if type(o.alias) == 'string' then
   o.alias = {
     o.alias --[[@as string]],
   }
 end

 if type(o.defaults) ~= 'table' then
   o.defaults = {
     if_true = o.defaults --[[@as string|boolean|number ]],
   }
 end
end

for _, o in ipairs(options.options) do
 preprocess(o)
end

return options